Part Number Hot Search : 
C3216 TFS52 BX2479W R4045PT 22182 CLP1351 07500 ATA5781
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download PXB4219 Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 D at a S hee t, DS 3 , M ay 2 00 2
IWE8 Interworking Element for 8 E1/T1 Lines PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221 V er s i o n 3 . 3
Datacom
Never
stop
thinking.
Edition 2002-05-06 Published by Infineon Technologies AG, St.-Martin-Strasse 53, D-81541 Munchen, Germany
(c) Infineon Technologies AG 5/6/02.
All Rights Reserved. Attention please! The information herein is given to describe certain components and shall not be considered as warranted characteristics. Terms of delivery and rights to technical change reserved. We hereby disclaim any and all warranties, including but not limited to warranties of non-infringement, regarding circuits, descriptions and charts stated herein. Infineon Technologies is an approved CECC manufacturer. Information For further information on technology, delivery terms and conditions and prices please contact your nearest Infineon Technologies Office in Germany or our Infineon Technologies Representatives worldwide (see address list). Warnings Due to technical requirements components may contain dangerous substances. For information on the types in question please contact your nearest Infineon Technologies Office. Infineon Technologies Components may only be used in life-support devices or systems with the express written approval of Infineon Technologies, if a failure of such components can reasonably be expected to cause the failure of that life-support device or system, or to affect the safety or effectiveness of that device or system. Life support devices or systems are intended to be implanted in the human body, or to support and/or maintain and sustain and/or protect human life. If they fail, it is reasonable to assume that the health of the user or other persons may be endangered.
D at a S hee t, DS 3 , M ay 2 00 2
IWE8 Interworking Element for 8 E1/T1 Lines PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221 V er s i o n 3 . 3
Datacom
Never
stop
thinking.
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221 Revision History: Previous Version: Page 234 ff. 252 ff. 2002-05-06 03.2000 DS3
Subjects (major changes since last revision) Jitter characteristics of the ICRC included Electrical characteristics of Framer, UTOPIA and RAM interface changed
For questions on technology, delivery and prices please contact the Infineon Technologies Offices in Germany or the Infineon Technologies Companies and Representatives worldwide: see our webpage at http://www.infineon.com
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.4 1.5 2 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 3 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.2.2 3.2 3.3 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.1.1 4.1.1.2 4.1.1.3 4.1.1.4 4.1.1.5 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.1.1 Page 17 18 20 21 22 22 24 24 25 25 25 26 27 30 30 31 33 34 35 36 36 37 38 38 38 38 39 40 41 45 45 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 49 49 49
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Echo Canceller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences Between PXB4220 And PXB4219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences Between PXB4220 And PXB4221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Definitions and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Framer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UTOPIA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Recovery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External RAM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not Connected Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAL Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unstructured CES Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structured CES Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Transmit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Transmit Buffer Filling Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Discarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell rate de-coupling: Idle/Unassigned Cell Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Payload Scrambling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HEC Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of ATM Transmit Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Receive Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Delineation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Data Sheet
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
4.2.1.2 HEC Check: Header Error Detection and Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.3 Cell Payload Descrambling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.4 Idle, Physical Layer or Unassigned Cell Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Setup of ATM Receive Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 AAL Segmentation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.1 Segmentation Port Decorrelation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.2 Segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.3 Transport of the Framer Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.4 Transport of CAS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.5 CAS Conditioning and Freezing Upstream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.6 Segmentation Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1.7 Padding Partially Filled Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Setup of AAL Segmentation Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 AAL Reassembly Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.1 Port and Channel Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.2 Sequence Number Protection field check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.3 Sequence Number field check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.4 RTS Extraction and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.5 Pointer Field Detection and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.6 CAS Conditioning and Freezing Downstream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.7 Insertion of Dummy Cells at Cell Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.8 Reassembly Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.9 Handling of Reassembly Buffer Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.10 Handling of Reassembly Buffer Underflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1.11 Synchronization of SDT Structure with Port Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.1 Setup of Reassembly Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.2 Physical Reassembly Buffer Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.3 Initialization of the Reassembly Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.4 Re-Initialization of the Reassembly Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Internal Clock Recovery Circuit (ICRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Frame Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Frame Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 RTS Receive FIFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.5 RTS Transmit FIFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.6 ICRC Loopback Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.7 RTS Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.8 Fractional Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.9 Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.10 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Sheet 6
51 52 52 54 55 55 55 56 56 57 57 58 58 59 61 61 61 61 62 62 62 63 63 63 64 64 65 65 65 66 67 72 73 74 74 74 75 76 76 76 77 77 77
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
4.5.11 4.5.11.1 4.5.11.2 4.5.11.3 4.5.11.4 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.2.1 4.11.2.2 4.11.2.3 5 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.1.1 5.1.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.2 5.1.3 5.1.3.1 5.1.3.2 5.1.4 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.2.1 5.2.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLL Block PLL-SRTS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLL-FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLL-ACM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS with ACM: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OAM Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loopback Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upstream Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downstream Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping of Channels to Timeslots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAL Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unstructured CES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structured CES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structured CES with CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77 77 78 78 80 81 81 81 81 82 83 83 83 84 85 86 87 87 88 88 89 90
Interface Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Generic Framer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 FALC Mode (FAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Generic Interface Mode (GIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Synchronous Modes (SYM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Synchronous Mode at 2.048 MHz (SYM2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Synchronous Mode at 8.192 MHz (SYM8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Echo Canceller Mode (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 UTOPIA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Port Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Back Pressure/ATM Cell Discarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 General Backpressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Port Specific Backpressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Sideband Signals of the UTOPIA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 IMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Clock Recovery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7 2002-05-06
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.6 5.7 5.8 6 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 6.1.1.3 6.1.1.4 6.1.1.5 6.1.2 6.1.2.1 6.1.2.2 6.1.2.3 6.1.2.4 6.1.2.5 6.1.3 6.1.3.1 6.1.4 6.1.4.1 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.7.1 6.2.7.2 6.2.8 7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6
Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microprocessor Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External RAM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Scan Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Configuration RAM's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: Receive Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: ATM Receive Reference Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: ATM Receive Continuation Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: AAL Receive Reference Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: AAL Receive Continuation Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM1: ATM or AAL Receive Idle Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: Transmit Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: ATM Transmit Reference Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: ATM Transmit Continuation Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: AAL Transmit Reference Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: AAL Transmit Continuation Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM2: ATM or AAL Transmit Idle Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM3: Transmit Port Configuration Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM3: AAL Transmit Reference Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM4: Transmit Port Configuration Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM4: AAL Transmit Conditioning Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statistics Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statistics Counter thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Insertion Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Extraction Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Segmentation/ATM Receive Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Receive Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Segmentation Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassembly/ATM Transmit Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Configuration Registers (pcfN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC Configuration Register (acfg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OAM Control Register (oamc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OAM-Counter Enable Register for ATM Ports (catm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OAM-Counter Enable Register for AAL Ports (caal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Byte-Pattern Register bp3 and bp2 (bp32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
114 114 115 117 118 119 120 121 121 121 123 123 126 127 127 127 128 129 132 133 134 134 135 136 137 137 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 146 146 148 151 154 156 157 158 159
Data Sheet
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18 7.19 7.20 7.21 7.22 7.23 7.24 7.25 7.26 7.27 7.28 7.29 7.30 7.31 7.32 7.33 7.34 7.35 7.36 7.37 7.38 7.39 7.40 7.41 7.42 7.43 7.44 7.45 7.46 7.47 7.48 7.49
Byte-Pattern Register bp1 and bp0 (bp10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Control Register (atmc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (rxid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (txid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loopback Control Register (lpbc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Fill Register for Partially Filled Cells (cfil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Mask Register 1 (imr1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer Enable Register (time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Delineation FSM Status Register (cdfs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version Register (vers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Monitor Register (ckmo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Status Register 1 (isr1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Interrupt Status 1 Register (eis1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Interrupt Status 2 Register (eis2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Interrupt Status 3 Register (eis3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Interrupt Status 4 Register (eis4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Status Register 2 (isr2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Mode Register (opmo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FT Clock Select Register (ftcs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter VCI Pattern 1 Register (cfvp1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter VCI Mask 1 Register (cfvm1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter VCI Pattern 2 Register (cfvp2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter VCI Mask 2 Register (cfvm2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter Payload Type Register (cfpt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Register (cmd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Filter Read Pointer Register (cfrp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Register (thrshld) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UTOPIA Configuration Register (utconf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAS 1 Register (cas1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAS 2 Register (cas2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAS 3 Register (cas3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Register for Ports 0 and 1 (thrsp01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Register for Ports 2 and 3 (thrsp23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Register for Ports 4 and 5 (thrsp45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Register for Ports 6 and 7 (thrsp67) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Interrupt Status 0 Register (eis0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD Timer Register (lcdtimer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Source Register (irs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Mask (irm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Clock Recovery Circuit Configuration Register (icrcconf) . . . . . . Configuration Register Downstream of Port N (condN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Source of Port N (irsN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt Mask of Port N (irmN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 173 174 175 176 177 178 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 204 206 207
Data Sheet
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
7.50 7.51 7.52 7.53 7.54 7.55 7.56 7.57 7.58 7.59 7.60 7.61 7.62 7.63 7.64 7.65 7.66 7.67 8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 8.3.8 9 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 9.6.2.1 9.6.2.2
Test Input of Port N (tsinN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Register Upstream Direction of Port N (conuN) . . . . . . . . Average Buffer Filling of Port N (avbN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACM Shift Factor of Port N (asfN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time of Initial Free Run of Port N (tiniN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold Out of Lock Detection of Port N (tresh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ICRC Parity Errors at Clock Recovery Interface (per) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ICRC Synchronization Errors at Clock Recovery Interface (scri) . . . . . . ICRC Clock Recovery Interface FIFO Overflow (crifo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ICRC Version Register (icrcv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Receive FIFO Underflow of Port N (sruN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Receive FIFO Overflow of Port N (sroN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Generator Reset of Port N (srrN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Invalid Value Processed of Port N (sriN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACM Data Too Late of Port N (atlN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Out Of Lock Register of Port N (oolN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Register of Port N (statN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Output Register of Port N (tsoutN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225
Application Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Clock Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Translating AAL Statistics Counters into the ATM Forum CES Version 2 MIB 228 Jitter Characteristics of the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit . . . . . . . . . . 230 ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal Package Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacitances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock and Reset Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface in GIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
242 242 243 244 245 246 247 247 248 248 251
Data Sheet
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
9.6.2.3 9.6.2.4 9.6.3 9.6.4 9.6.5 9.6.6 9.6.6.1 9.6.6.2 9.6.7 9.6.8 10 10.1 10.2 10.3 11 12 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 13 14 15
Framer Interface in SYM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface in EC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UTOPIA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Recovery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary-Scan Test Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Identification Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instruction Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary-Scan Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
254 256 256 260 261 262 262 264 265 266 268 268 268 268
Package Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Adaptation Layer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronous Residual Time Stamp SRTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptive Clock Method ACM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Associated Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 274 278 280 281 281 282
Contacts for SRTS Patent Fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Data Sheet
11
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
List of Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39
Data Sheet
Page
Logic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Typical IWE8 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Line Card for 8 T1/E1 Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Echo Canceller Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Cell delineation state diagram (Figure 5/I.432.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Maintenance state transition diagram for cell delineation events (Figure 2/ I.432.3) 50 HEC: Receiver mode of Operation (Figure 3/ITU I.432.1) . . . . . . . . . . 51 HEC Detection According to ATM Forum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Pre-assigned cell header values at the UNI for use by the physical layer (excluding the HEC field) (Table 1/I.361) 53 Pre-defined header field values [11] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 SAR-PDU of AAL Type 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Synchronization of SRTS Generation with the Start of Segmentation . 60 Reassembly Buffer Initialization: No CDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Reassembly Buffer Initialization: positive CDV at Start Up . . . . . . . . . 68 Reassembly Buffer Initialization: Negative CDV at Start Up . . . . . . . . 69 Reassembly Buffer Initialization for structured CES: positive CDV at Start Up 70 Block Diagram of the ICRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Transient Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Influence of Damping on Lock in Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Connection of IWE8 to QuadFALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Framer Interface in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Framer Interface in GIM T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Framer Interface in GIM E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Framer Interface in SYM2 E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Framer Interface in SYM8 E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Framer Interface in EC Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 UTOPIA Receive and Transmit Interfaces in Slave Mode . . . . . . . . . 107 Utopia Sideband Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 IMA Interface Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Connection of IWE8 to an Intel Type Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Connection of IWE8 to an Motorola Type Microprocessor . . . . . . . . 116 External RAM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 RAM Interface Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Memory Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Structure of the IWE8 external RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Clock Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . 230
12 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator. . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . Input/Output Waveforms for AC Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock and Reset Interface Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Receive Interface Timing in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Transmit Interface Timing in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Receive Interface Timing in GIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Transmit Interface Timing in GIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface Timing for SYM 2.048 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface Timing in SYM 8.192 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framer Interface Timing in EC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup and hold time definition (single- and multi PHY) . . . . . . . . . . . Tri-state timing (multi-PHY, multiple devices only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing of the IMA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Recovery Interface Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intel Mode Write Cycle Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intel Mode Read Cycle Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola Mode Timing Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Interface Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary-Scan Test Interface Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Package Outline: P-BGA-256 (Plastic Metric Quad Flat Package) Structure of the AAL1 SAR-PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Informative and Example Algorithm State Machine (Fig. III.2/I.363.1) The Concept of Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS) (Fig. 5/ I.363.1) 278 Figure 77 Generation of Residual Time Stamp (RTS) (Fig.6/ I.363.1) . . . . . . . . Figure 78 Example Multiframe Structure for 3x64 Kbit/s E1 with CAS. . . . . . . .
Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76
231 232 232 233 234 235 235 236 237 238 238 239 240 241 241 247 247 248 250 251 252 254 255 256 257 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 273 274 276
279 282
Data Sheet
13
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
List of Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 58 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 66 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 36 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41
Data Sheet
Page
Generic Framer Interface (73 pins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 UTOPIA Interface (36 pins). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 IMA Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Clock Recovery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Microprocessor Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 External RAM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Test Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Not Connected Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Functions of IWE8 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 ATM Cell Discarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Activation sequence for ATM transmit ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Activation sequence for ATM receive ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Definition of the CAS Signalling Conditioning Nibbles. . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Relationship between Cell Filling and Segmentation Buffer Subblock Size Cell Filling level values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Activation sequence for AAL segmentation channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Activation sequence for AAL reassembly channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Relationship between Cell Filling and Reassembly Buffer Subblock Size Coding of Slot Type in internal configuration RAMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 RAM slot positions for ITU-T G.804 compliant ATM mapping . . . . . . 87 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES in AAL mode . . . . . . . . . . 89 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES with CAS in AAL mode. . . 91 Time slot Mapping in T1 Translation Mode 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 F-Channel Format in T1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Clock Recovery Interface frame format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Configuration of the Microprocessor Interface Mode via PMT and TBUS . 115 Master Clock Frequency Depending on Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Statistics Counters for ATM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Statistics Counters for AAL Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Internal Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Clock and Reset Interface AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Framer Transmit Interface Timing in FAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Framer Transmit Interface Timing in GIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Framer Interface AC Timing Characteristics in SYM2 Mode . . . . . . 254 Framer Interface Timing in SYM8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Framer Interface Timing in EC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
14 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55
Transmit Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz at Cell Interface, Single PHY) . 258 Receive Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz at Cell Interface, Single PHY). . 258 Transmit Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz at Cell Interface, Multi-PHY) . . 259 Receive Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz at Cell Interface, Multi-PHY) . . . 259 Clock Recovery Interface AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Intel Mode Write Cycle AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Intel Mode Read Cycle AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Motorola Mode AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 RAM Interface AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Boundary-Scan Test Interface AC Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . 267 Boundary Scan Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Bit allocation of channel associated 64 kbit/s time slot 16 for channel associated signalling 281 Allocation of Channel Associated Signalling Bits to 24 Frame Multiframe. 283
Data Sheet
15
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Your Comments We welcome your comments on this document. We are continuously trying improving our documentation. Please send your remarks and suggestions by e-mail to sc.docu_comments@infineon.com Please provide in the subject of your e-mail: device name (IWE8), device number (PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221), device version (Version 3.3), and in the body of your e-mail: document type (Data Sheet), issue date (2002-05-06) and document revision number (DS3).
Data Sheet 16 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Overview
1
Overview
The Interworking Element for 8 E1/T1 Lines PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221 (IWE8) is a member of Infineon's ATM chip set. Together with framing and line interface components (e.g. Infineon's QuadFALC PEB 22554) the IWE8 serves as gateway between Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) networks and timeslot based PDH networks. Each of the 8 E1 or T1 input and output ports can be configured independently to operate in one of two basic modes: ATM Mode ATM mode ports operate as an ATM User Network Interface (UNI) at 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.544 Mbit/s (T1). The device supports mapping of ATM cells in T1/E1 frames according to ITU-T G.804, "ATM Cell Mapping into Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH)" [26] and ATM Forum, "ATM on Fractional E1/T1" [9]. It implements all Transmission Convergence (TC) sublayer functions of the Physical Layer (PHY) defined in ITU-T I.432, "B-ISDN User-network Interface - Physical layer Specification" [32] AAL Mode AAL mode ports operate as an ATM Circuit Emulation Service Interworking Function (CES-IWF) between Constant Bit Rate (CBR) equipment and an ATM network as described by the ATM Forum, "Circuit Emulation Services Version 2.0" [10]. (only PXB 4220/4221) The CBR circuits are converted into ATM constant bit-rate virtual channels using the ATM Adaptation Layer type 1 (AAL1) as defined in I.363.1, "B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer Specification, Types 1 and 2" [31] or without any ATM Adaptation Layer overhead, which will be referred as AAL type 0 throughout the rest of this document. The IWE8 provides the segmentation and reassembly function. Both the "Unstructured DS1/E1 Service" and the "Structured DS1/E1 N x 64 kbit/s Basic Service" as described in the "Circuit Emulation Services Version 2.0" by the ATM Forum in [10] are supported. For simplicity reasons the shorthand notation "Unstructured CES" will be used to identify the "Unstructured DS1/E1 Service" while the "Structured DS1/E1 N x 64 kbit/s Service" will be referred to as "Structured CES" throughout the rest of this document.
Data Sheet
17
2002-05-06
Interworking Element for 8 E1/T1 Lines IWE8
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Version 3.3
1.1
Features
* Full duplex ATM Packetizer/Depacketizer for 8 E1/T1 highways * Configurable to T1 or E1 mode via external pin * 8 T1/E1 ports configurable independently to ATM or AAL Mode * ATM Mode (PXB 4219/4220/4221): - ATM cell mapping into PDH according to ITUT G.804 [26] - B-ISDN User-Network interface - Physical Layer according to ITU-T I.432 [32] - B-ISDN User-Network interface - Physical Layer oparation at 1544 KBit/s and 2048 KBit/s according to ITU-T I.432.3 [34] * AAL Mode (PXB 4220/4221): - AAL1 according to ITU-T I.363.1 [31] or transparent without any adaptation layer overhead (AAL0) - T1/E1 unstructured service according to ATM Forum af-vtoa-0078.000 [10] section 3 - Structured T1/E1 N x 64 Kbit/s service according to [10] section 2 with M channels of N x 64 Kbit/s (M,N = 1to 24 for T1) (M,N = 1to 32 for E1) - Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) support according to [10] - Echo Canceller Mode - Partially filled cells with programmable filling thresholds - Selectable Sequence Count Algorithm: - Robust/Fast according to ITU-T I.363.1 [30] - According to ETSI (prl-ETS 300353 annex D) [17] - Fast: Saves 6 ms during reassembly for 1 x 64 Kbit/s connection - AAL0 option: 48 Bytes user payload per ATM Cell, without AAL overhead - Reassembly buffer can compensate up to +/- 4 ms Cell Delay Variation (CDV) - Statistics counters per channel for lost/misinserted/errored cells etc.
Type PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Data Sheet
Package P-BGA-256
18 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Overview - Internal clock recovery circuit using Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS) or Adaptive Clock Method (ACM) for unstructured CES ports. For SRTS a patent fee needs to be paid. Optionally, it's possible to order the PXB 4221 device, which comes without SRTS clock recovery. - Trunk freezing and conditioning according to Bellcore TR-NWT-000170 [14] IMA interface: - Programmable threshold between read and write pointer of Mapping Buffer - Output Signal for buffer threshold crossing - Output Signal for discarded cell - Output pins for port number indication 8 generic framer interfaces with integrated transmit clock selector supporting - Synchronous Mode (SYM) - Generic Interface Mode (GIM) - FALC Mode (FAM): Glue-less interface for Infineon's Framer and Line Interface Components (FALC) - Echo Canceller Mode (EC): ATM cells are duplicated internally and transmitted via two framer ports UTOPIA industry standard interface: - Level 2 in slave mode; 8 data, 5 address lines - Level 1 in master/slave mode - UTOPIA clock up to 38.88 MHz 16-bit generic microprocessor interface for control and configuration of the chip runs either in Intel 386EX or Motorola compatible mode External synchronous Flow-Through SSRAM 1 x 64K x 33 bit or 1 x 64K x 32 bit required Build-in data path loops for test Cell insertion/extraxtion via microprocessor interface 3.3 Volt power supply with 5 Volt tolerant inputs Typical power dissipation 1 Watt P-BGA 256 package Temperature range from -40 to +85C
*
*
*
* * * * * * * *
Data Sheet
19
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Overview
1.2
Logic Symbol
CR Interface
Test Interface
ITST[0-3]
SDOR
SDOD
TMS
SSP
SDI
OUTTR
UTTR
TRST
SCLK
TDO
TCK
TDI
MPDATA[0-15] MPADR[0-17]
RXCLK
RXADR[0-4] RXDAT[0-7] RXPTY RXSOC RXCLAV RXENB
Microprocessor Interface
MPCS MPWR MPRD MPRDY MPIR1,2
PXB 4220
RMADR[0-15] RMDAT[0-32] RMCS RMOE RMWR RMCLK
FRMFB[0-7] FTCKO[0-7] FRLOS[0-7] FRFRS[0-7]
TXCLK TXADR[0-4] TXDAT[0-7] TXPTY TXSOC TXCLAV TXENB
UTOPIA Interface (Level 2)
RAM Interface
UNCHEC
RMADC
FTMFS[0-7]
FRDAT[0-7]
FRCLK[0-7]
FTFRS[0-7]
FTDAT[0-7]
ATBTC
PN0
Framer Interface
IMA Interface
Figure 1
Logic Symbol
Data Sheet
20
PN1
PN2
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Overview
1.3
Typical Applications
Figure 2 illustrates three typical application areas which utilize the IWE8 chip in Line Interface Cards (LICs) or Network Interface Controllers (NICs). Application 1 utilizes the IWE8 as an internetworking device for communication between a narrowband Time-Slot based network and an ATM network. Application 2 utilizes the IWE8 chip to enable the use of an existing T1/E1 access line for connection to an ATM network. In application 3, the IWE8 chip enables terminals using a Leased Line or Time-Slot based service to convert from T1/E1 network connection to ATM network connection without noticeable changes to the subscriber.
Application 1
PBX PBX DS1/E1 Links DS1/E1 Links
0
IWETM
7
8
Structured Circuit Emulation Service for DS1/E1 (Nx64kbit/s with/without partially filled cells) over ATM
ATM Links
Application 2
Multiservice Switch
0
IWETM 8
7
NNI/UNI 2.048 Mbps, NNI/UNI 1.544 Mbps (I.432.2, G.804)
ATM Network
Application 3
PBX PBX DS1/E1 Links DS1/E1 Links
0
ATM Links
IWETM
7
8
Unstructured Circuit Emulation Service for DS1/E1 (with/ without partially filled cells) for Leased Lines over ATM
Figure 2
Typical IWE8 Applications
The PXB 4220 IWE8 chip is designed to handle up to eight T1/E1 ports. It transfers data between the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)-highway and an UTOPIA ATM Interface.
Data Sheet
21
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Overview
1.3.1
Line Card
Figure 3 shows an example Line Interface Card (LIC) utilizing the IWE8 in a switch environment. Two Infineon Quad Framer and Line Interface Component (QuadFALC, PEB 22554) chips are connected at the PCM ports. An ATM Layer circuit is connected at the UTOPIA Interface port and could be implemented using Infineon PXB 4350 ATM Layer Processor (ALP) chip.
T1/E1 Lines Serial Interface FT SSRAM 64 K x 36 Bit UTOPIA Interface Switching Network
Mag.
QuadFALC PEB 22554
ATM Layer Circuit e.g. ALP PXB 4350 IWE8 Clock Supply Clock = 25 MHz
Mag.
QuadFALC PEB 22554
Figure 3
Line Card for 8 T1/E1 Channels
External synchronous SRAM is always required for proper IWE8 operation. The IWE8 requires only one main operating clock of 12 times the datarate of one port. An emergency clock of 32.768 MHz is optional. The Framer and Utopia interface clocks can be completely asynchronous with respect to the main clock. A microprocessor controls and operates the IWE8 via a generic 16-bit interface.
1.3.2
Echo Canceller
In communication links reflections resulting in an electrical echo are due to hybrid splits or imperfect terminations in subscriber loops. Acoustical echoes may occur due to poor isolation of microphone and speaker of some telephone systems. These electrical and acoustical echoes disturb the quality of the transmission. To ensure high quality, pure data transmission the ITU-T suggests in the recommendation G.131 [22] the use of echo cancellers. Echo cancellation is extremely desirable for data links with total round trip transmission times of more than 50 ms.
Data Sheet
22
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Overview
IWU PDH network
FALC LH PEB2255 SIDEC PEB20954 IWE8 PXB4220
ATM network
Near End
Far End
Figure 4
Echo Canceller Application
The echo cancelling function itself is performed in STM. In the application above the IWE8 is used to translate voice ATM channels into STM channels and vice versa. Infineon's Smart Integrated Digital Echo Canceller (SIDEC, PEB 20954) is used for cancellation of the echo that is generated by reflection on the near end side and heard by the far end speaker. The SIDEC can cancel end echo paths (SDH or PDH network on near end side) up to 128 ms. For details see [21]
Data Sheet
23
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Overview
1.4
Differences Between PXB4220 And PXB4219
The IWE8 type PXB4219 does only support the ATM mode used for ITU-T G.804 compliant ATM cell mapping into the plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) at line rates of 1544 kbit/s and 2048 kbit/s. The AAL mode is not available.
1.5
Differences Between PXB4220 And PXB4221
The IWE8 type PXB4220 uses an internal clock recovery mechanism (SRTS) which is patented by Bellcore. Related Patents are: * Bellcore patent No. 5,260,978 (Synchronous Residual Time Stamp for Timing Recovery in a broadband network) * Bellcore patent No. 4,839,306 (Method and apparatus for multiplexing circuit and packet traffic) Infineon Technologies is not allowed to collect SRTS license fees on the IWE8 on behalf of Bellcore. Contacts for license issues are given in Chapter 13. Every IWE8 customer must get in contact with Bellcore legal department by himself to clarify whether his application needs to license the SRTS functionality. For customers who do not want to use the built-in SRTS mechanism, Infineon provides a special version of the IWE8. The name of this device is PXB4221 and covers the same functionality (pin and register compatible) like the PXB4220. SRTS is physically and permanently disabled, so that no patent fees have to be paid.
Data Sheet
24
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions
2
2.1
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
GN D
Pin Descriptions
Pin Diagram
B
FT CKO_4
C
T CK
D
T MS
E
MPWR_N
F
MPDA T _2
G
MPDA T _5
H
MPDA T _8
J
L
M
N
PN_0
P
MPA DR_1
R
MPA DR_4
S
MPA DR_6
T
MPADR_9
U
V
W
Y
T XA DR_1
P-BGA-256
MPDA T _12 MPDA T _15 RFCLK MPA DR_13 MPA DR_16 E 1DS1 FTMFS_7 FT DA T _7 FT CKO_5 T DO MPCS_N MPDA T _1 MPDA T _4 MPDA T _7 MPDA T _11 MPDA T _13 CLOCK MPIR1_N MPA DR_2 MPA DR_5 MPA DR_8 MPADR_12 MPA DR_15 CLK52 T XA DR_0 T XA DR_3
FRMFB_7
FRFRSN_7
FT FRSN_7
N. C.
T RST _N
MPRD_N
MPDA T _3
MPDA T _6
MPDA T _10 MPDA T _14 RE SE T _N
MPIR2_N
MPA DR_3
MPA DR_7
MPA DR_11 MPADR_14 LICE C
TSCE N
T XA DR_2
RXA DR_2
FRLOS_7
FRDA T _7
FT CKO_7
GND
T DI
VDD
MPDA T _0
GND
MPDA T _9
VDD
MPRDY
MPA DR_0
GND
MPA DR_10 VDD
MPADR_17 GND
RXA DR_0
T XA DR_4
RXA DR_3
FRFRSN_6
FT FRSN_6
FRCLK_7
FT CKO_6
RXA DR_1
RXA DR_4
PN_1
PN_2
FRCLK_6
FRMFB_6
FT MFS_6
VDD
VDD
TXCLA
T XSOC
T XDA T _0
FTFRSN_5
FRLOS_6
FRDA T _6
FT DA T _6
PBGA 256 Bottom View
T XE NB_N
TXDA T _1
T XDA T _2
T XDA T _3
FRFRSN_5
FT DA T _5
FT MFS_5
GND
GND
TXDA T _4
T XDA T _5
T XDA T _6
FRLOS_5
FRCLK_5
FRDA T _5
FRMFB_5
T XDA T _7
TXPRT
UT T R_N
T XCLK
FRFRSN_4
FT DA T _4
FT MFS_4
FT FRSN _4
VDD
RXCLA
RXSOC
A T BT C
T SCSH
FRDA T _4
FRMFB_4
VDD
RXDA T _3
RXDA T _2
RXDA T _1
RXDA T _0
FRCLK_4
FRLOS_4
FT FRSN_3
FT MFS_3
RXDA T _7
RXDA T _6
RXDA T _5
RXDA T _4
FTDA T _3
FRFRSN_3
FT CKO_3
GND
GND
RXCLK
RXE NB_N RXPRT
FRMFB_3
FRDA T _3
FRCLK_3
FT MFS_2
RMDA T _3
RMDA T _0
RMCLK
OUT T R_N
FRLOS_3
FT FRSN_2
FT DA T _2
VDD
VDD
RMDA T _4
RMDA T _1
PMT
FRFRSN_2
FT CKO_2
FRMFB_2
FRLOS_2
RMDA T _9
RMDA T _7
RMDA T _5
RMDA T _2
FRDA T _2
FT MFS_1
FT FRSN_1
GND
FT FRSN_0
VDD
FRCLK_0
GND
RMA DR_7
RMA DR_3
VDD
RMDA T _31 GND
RMDA T _22 VDD
SSP
GND
RMDA T _10 RMDA T _8
RMDA T _6
FRCLK_2
FT DA T _1
FRMFB_1
FRLOS_1
FRFRSN_0
FRDA T _0
RMA DR_14 RMA DR_10 RMA DR_6
RMA DR_2
RMADC_N RMDA T _32 RMDA T _28 RMDA T _25 RMDA T _21 RMDA T _19 RMDA T _16 TBUS
RMDA T _11 SDI
FRFRSN_1
N. C.
FRCLK_1
FT DA T _0
FRMFB_0
RMA DR_15 RMA DR_12 RMA DR_9
RMA DR_5
RMA DR_1
RMOE _N
RMWR_N
RMDA T _29 RMDA T _26 RMDA T _23 RMDA T _20 RMDA T _15 RMDA T _14 RMDA T _13 RMDA T _
FTCKO_1
FRDA T _1
FT MFS_0
FT CKO_0
FRLOS_0
RMA DR_13 RMA DR_11 RMA DR_8
RMA DR_4
RMA DR_0
UNCHE C
RMCS_N
RMDA T _30 RMDA T _27 RMDA T _24 SCLK
RMDA T _18 RMDA T _17 SDOR
SDOD
Figure 5
Pin Configuration
2.2
Pin Definitions and Functions
Output Pull Up and Pull Down Type Definitions PUx PDx Tri Pull Up of strength x (x = A, B) is implemented. The corresponding current is specified in Chapter 9.4 Pull Down of strength x (x = A) is implemented. The corresponding current is specified in Chapter 9.4 Tri-stated when inactive
Data Sheet
25
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions
2.2.1
Table 1 Pin No. G17, C19, A18, C14, A12, B9, A6, C5 F18, B20, A17, B14, B11, C9, C7, B4 E19, C18, C16, A14, C11, D9, B6, A3 E18, A19, A16, B13, A10, A8, A5, B3 E20, D18, D16, A15, B12, A9, B7, A4
Generic Framer Interface
Generic Framer Interface (73 pins) Symbol FRCLK[7:0] Input (I) Function Output (O) I Framer Receive Clock Receive clock for the framer interface
FRDAT[7:0]
I PDA
Framer Receive Data Receive data input of the framer interface
FRMFB[7:0]
I PUA
Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Indication that a new multi-/superframe is available on the receive side of the framer interface Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Indication that a new frame is available on the receive side of the framer interface Framer Receive Loss of Signalling Indication that CAS bits are invalid, IWE8 will start CAS freezing Framer Transmit Clock Transmit clock for the framer interface. * Recovered clock output from the ICRC * Framer receive clock output from pin FRCLKN * Output of the clock derived from RFCLK * Input for an external clock recovery device Framer Transmit Data Transmit data output of the framer interface
FRFRS[7:0]
O PUA
FRLOS[7:0]
I PDA
D20, A20, FTCKO[7:0] B16, C13, B1, C2, D5, C4
O/I PDA
D19, B18, C15, A13, B10, B8, D7, B2
FTDAT[7:0]
O PUA
Data Sheet
26
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions Table 1 Pin No. C20, B17, D14, D12, C10, C8, C6, A2 E17, C17, B15, C12, D10, A7, B5, C3 L1 Generic Framer Interface (73 pins) (cont'd) Symbol FTMFS[7:0] Input (I) Function Output (O) O PUA Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Indication that a new multi-/superframe is available on the transmit side of the framer interface Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse Indication that a new frame is available on the transmit side of the framer interface Reference Clock SYM and EC mode: Central framer interface clock for all framer ports FAM and GIM: Optional SRTS/ACM reference or emergency clock for the framer receive interface in case of clock failure
FTFRS[7:0]
O PUA
RFCLK
I
2.2.2
Table 2 Pin No. Y11, W11, V11, U11, Y12, W12, V12, U12 Y13
UTOPIA Interface
UTOPIA Interface (36 pins) Symbol RXDAT[7:0] Input (I) Function Output (O) O PUA UTOPIA Receive Data Bus Byte-wide data driven from PHY to ATM layer. RxData[7] is the MSB. UTOPIA Receive Odd Parity Bit Odd parity for RXDAT[0:7] driven by the PHY layer. UTOPIA Receive Start-of-Cell Active high signal asserted by the PHY layer when RXDAT[0:7] contains the first valid byte of a cell.
RXPTY
O PUA O PDA
W10
RXSOC
Data Sheet
27
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions Table 2 Pin No. V10 UTOPIA Interface (36 pins) (cont'd) Symbol RXCLAV Input (I) Function Output (O) Slave: O Master: I PDA UTOPIA Receive Cell Available Slave: RXCLAV is an active high signal asserted by the PHY layer to indicate that it has data available for transfer to the ATM layer. Master: RXCLAV is an active high signal asserted by the ATM layer to indicate that it has data available for transfer to the PHY layer. UTOPIA Receive Clock Transfer/synchronization clock from the ATM layer to the PHY layer for synchronizing transfers on RXDAT[0:7]. UTOPIA Receive Enable Slave: Active low signal asserted by the ATM layer to indicate that RXDAT[0:7] and RXSOC will be sampled at the end of the next cycle. Master: Active low signal asserted by the PHY layer to indicate that RXDAT[0:7] and RXSOC will be sampled at the end of the next cycle. UTOPIA Receive Address Bus Five bit wide true data driven from the ATM to MPHY layer to select the appropriate MPHY device. RXADR[4] is the MSB. UTOPIA Transmit Data Bus Byte-wide true data driven from ATM to PHY layer. TXDAT[7] is the MSB. UTOPIA Transmit Odd Parity Bit TXPTY is the odd parity bit over TXDAT[0:7] driven by the ATM layer. UTOPIA Transmit Start-of-Cell Active high signal asserted by the ATM layer when TXDAT[0:7] contains the first valid byte of the cell.
28 2002-05-06
V13
RXCLK
I
W13
RXENB
Slave: I Master: O PUA
V4, U5, Y3, RXADR[4:0] Y4, V5
I PUA
Y6, V7, W7, Y7, V8, W8, Y8, U9 V9
TXDAT[7:0]
I PUA
TXPTY
I PUA I PDA
W6
TXSOC
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions Table 2 Pin No. V6 UTOPIA Interface (36 pins) (cont'd) Symbol TXCLAV Input (I) Function Output (O) Slave: O Master: I PDA UTOPIA Transmit Cell Available Slave: TXCLAV is an active high signal asserted by the PHY layer to indicate it can accept data. Master: TXCLAV is an active high signal asserted by the ATM layer to indicate it can accept data. UTOPIA Transmit Clock Data transfer/synchronization clock provided by the ATM layer to the PHY layer for synchronizing transfers on TXDAT[0:7]. UTOPIA Transmit Enable Slave: Active low signal asserted by the
Y9
TXCLK
I
U7
TXENB
Slave: I Master: O PUA
ATM layer during cycles when TXDAT[0:7] contains valid cell data. Master: Active low signal asserted by the PHY layer during cycles when TXDAT[0:7] contains valid cell data.
UTOPIA Transmit Address Bus Five bit wide true data driven from the ATM to MPHY layer to poll and select the appropriate MPHY device. TXADR4 is the MSB.
W2, Y1, W3, Y2, W4
TXADR[4:0]
I PUA
Data Sheet
29
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions
2.2.3
Table 3 Pin No. Y10
IMA Interface
IMA Interface Symbol ATBTC Input (I) Output (O) O Tri Function ATM Transmit Buffer Threshold Crossing Indicates if the difference between the write and read pointer of the mapping buffer became smaller than a SW selectable threshold Uncorrectable HEC Error Indicates if a cell has been discarded due to an uncorrectable HEC error Port Number Indicates the port number where the cell causing ATBT or UNCHEC being asserted came from
L20
UNCHEC
O Tri O Tri
M1, W5, Y5
PN[2:0]
2.2.4
Table 4 Pin No. Y18 Y20 W20 T17 T20
Clock Recovery Interface
Clock Recovery Interface Symbol SDI SDOD SDOR SSP SCLK Input (I) Function Output (O) I O Tri O Tri O Tri O Tri Serial Data Input Clock recovery frame input. Serial Data Output Data Clock recovery frame output Serial Data Output Reset Clock recovery reset frame output Serial Synchronization Pulse Frame synchronization pulse output Serial Clock Clock output of the clock recovery interface. Runs at the same frequency than the CLOCK input
Data Sheet
30
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions
2.2.5
Table 5 Pin No.
Microprocessor Interface
Microprocessor Interface Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) I/O PUA Microprocessor Data Bus This bidirectional three-state bus provides the general-purpose data path between the IWE8 and an external master. The bus uses little endian word order. MPDAT15 is the MSB. Microprocessor Address Bus Provides the address of the current bus cycle. Addresses are 16-bit aligned. MPADR17 is the MSB of the bus
G4, F2, F1, MPDAT[15:0] G3, G2, G1, H3, H2, H1, J4, J3, J2, J1, K2, K3, K1 M4, N1, MPADR[17:0] N2, N3, P1, P2, R1, P3, R2, T1, P4, R3, T2, U1, T3, U2, V1, T4 E2 MPCS
I
I
Microprocessor Chip Select This signal is driven by the bus master to indicate a read or write access. Microprocessor Write Enable (Intel Bus Mode) This signal is driven by the bus master to indicate a write data transfer Read/Write Enable (Motorola Bus Mode) This three-state signal is driven by the bus master to indicate the direction of the bus's data transfer Microprocessor Read Enable (Intel Bus Mode) This signal is driven by the bus master to indicate a read data transfer Microprocessor Transfer Start (Motorola Bus Mode) This signal is asserted by the bus master to indicate the start of a bus cycle that transfers data to or from the device
E1
MPWR/ MPRW
I
F3
MPRD/ MPTS
I
Data Sheet
31
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions Table 5 Pin No. L4 Microprocessor Interface (cont'd) Symbol Input (I) Function Output (O) O Tri Microprocessor Ready (Intel Bus Mode) This three-state output indicates that the device has accepted date from the master (write) or has driven the data bus with valid data (read) Microprocessor Transfer Acknowledge (Motorola Bus Mode) This three-state output indicates that the device has accepted date from the master (write) or has driven the data bus with valid data (read) Microprocessor Interrupt Request 1 Main interrupt pin indicating a special event in the IWE8. Microprocessor Interrupt Request 2 This signal is generated by timer set 2 to indicate that a counter expired
MPRDY MPTA
M2
MPIR1
O PUB O PUB
M3
MPIR2
Data Sheet
32
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions
2.2.6
Table 6 Pin No. K20, K19, K18, K17, J20, J19, J18, J17, H20, H19, H18, G20, G19, F20, G18, F19 V14, W15, Y16, U14, V15, W16, Y17, V16, W17, U16, V17, W18, Y19, W19, V19, U19, U18, V20, U20, T18, T19, R18, P17, R19, R20, P18, P19, P20, N18, N19, N20, M17, M18 M20
External RAM Interface
External RAM Interface Symbol RMADR[15:0] Input (I) Function Output (O) O Tri RAM Address Bus This bus provides the address of the current bus cycle. RMADR15 is the MSB.
RMDAT[32:0]
I/O PUB
RAM Data Bus This bidirectional three-state bus provides the data path between the IWE8 and the external memory. RMDAT32 is parity bit, RMDAT31 is the MSB.
RMCS
O Tri O Tri O Tri
RAM Chip Select This signal enables read or write accesses to the external memory RAM Output Enable This signal enables the outputs of the external memory RAM Write Enable This output is asserted when a write access to the external memory
L19
RMOE
M19
RMWR
Data Sheet
33
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions Table 6 Pin No. L18 External RAM Interface (cont'd) Symbol RMADC Input (I) Function Output (O) O Tri O Tri RAM Address Control This output is asserted to indicate a valid address on RMADR[15:0] RAM Clock Clock output for the external RAM. It runs at the same frequency as CLOCK input
W14
RMCLK
2.2.7
Table 7 Pin No. D2 E4 C1 D1
Test Interface
Test Interface Symbol TDO TDI TCK TMS Input (I) Output (O) O Tri I PUA I PUA I PUA I PDA I PDA Function Boundary Scan Test Data Output Boundary Scan Test Data Input Boundary Scan Test Clock Boundary Scan Test Mode Select 0 = normal operation 1 = Enable boundary scan test mode Boundary Scan Test Reset Internal Test Pins TSCEN and TSCSH must be low for proper operation
E3 V3 A11 Y15 V18
TRST TSCEN TSCSH PMT TBUS
PDA
Internal Test Pins 00 = Intel mode 01 = prohibited 10 = prohibited 11 = Motorola Mode
Data Sheet
34
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions Table 7 Pin No. W9 Test Interface (cont'd) Symbol UTTR Input (I) Output (O) I PUA I Function Utopia TRI-STATE 0 = tristate all Utopia outputs 1 = normal operation Output TRI-STATE 0 = tristate all outputs and disable all pull-up and pull-down resistors 1 = normal operation
Y14
OUTTR
2.2.8
Table 8 Pin No. W1 1)
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous Symbol E1/T1 Input (I) Output (O) I PUA I PUA I I PDA I Function E1 or T1 Mode Select 0 = T1 mode 1 = E1 mode Echo Canceller Mode Select 0 = echo canceller mode 1 = standard mode Master Clock Used to clock the core of the device Master Hardware Reset Asynchronous reset of all flip-flops 51.84 MHz SRTS Reference Clock external reference clock for SRTS. If SRTS mode is not used, it can be connected to VSS
U3 1)
EC
L2 L3 2) V2
CLOCK RESET CLK52
Data Sheet
35
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Pin Descriptions
2.2.9
Table 9 Pin No. D6, D11, D15, F4, F17, K4, L17, R4, R17, U6, U10, U15
Power Supply
Power Supply Symbol VDD Input (I) Function Output (O) Power Supply Voltage
A1, D4, D8, GND D13, D17, H4, H17, N4, N17, U4, U8, U13,U17
Ground
2.2.10
Table 10 Pin No. B19, D3
Not Connected Pins
Not Connected Pins Symbol N.C. Input (I) Function Output (O) Not Connected
Data Sheet
36
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Functional Description
3
Functional Description
All functional parts of the device are implemented in hardware. Configuration of the functional blocks has to be done by software via the micro controller interface. The IWE8 provides two independent data paths for upstream, towards the ATM network, and downstream, from the ATM network, direction. For dedicated functional tests loopbacks between both are available. Each of the 8 ports connected to the data path works independent from the others. It can be switched to ATM or AAL mode and provides access to the E1/T1 Framer at different framer interface protocols.
Data Sheet
37
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Functional Description
3.1 3.1.1
Operating Modes ATM Mode
A port that is configured to ATM mode offers ITU-T G.804 [26] compliant ATM cell mapping into PDH frames at E1 or T1 datarates. ATM mode can be enabled via "p_atm" in register "pcfN".
3.1.2
AAL Mode
A port that is configured to AAL mode offers ATM Forum [10] compliant circuit emulation services via AAL1 as defined in ITU-T I.361.1 [31]. A port N can be configured to AAL mode via "p_atm" in register "pcfN". Some features of the AAL mode are controlled by the internal registers "acfg", "caal", "bp32", "bp10" and "cfil". The features controlled by these registers are common to all AAL ports. Some features of the AAL mode can be controlled per port, by programming the port configuration registers "pcfN". Some features of the AAL mode can be controlled per channel, by programming the channel specific "AAL Reference Slot" in the internal configuration RAM's (RAM1 for receive ports, RAM2, RAM3 and RAM4 for transmit ports).
3.1.2.1
Unstructured CES Mode
A 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.544 Mbit/s (T1) bitstream is packed into ATM cells without any framing. No alignment between octets in E1 or T1 frames and octets in the ATM cells is done. For this Unstructured T1/E1 Circuit Emulation Service (CES) the ATM adaptation layer type 1(AAL1) with Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) as defined in ITU-T I.363.1[31] is used. The use of partially filled cells is possible. For clock recovery the IWE8 supports the Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS) method and Adaptive Clock Method (ACM). * SRTS is possible on channels with completely filled cells * ACM can be used on both, channels with partially and completely filled cells A port is programmed to unstructured CES via "p_ces" in the Port Configuration Register "pcfN". Per port a Segmentation Buffer with a maximum size of 16 cells and a Reassembly Buffer with a maximum size of 256 cells is implemented in external RAM.
Data Sheet
38
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Functional Description
3.1.2.2
Structured CES Mode
A port is programmed for the Structured T1/E1 Nx64 kbit/s Basic Service (Structured CES) via the port configuration register "pcfN" ("p_ces" = 0). The structured circuit emulation service is intended to carry N of the 24 (T1) or 32 (E1) timeslots across the ATM network. An emulated Nx64 kbit/s circuit will be referred to as a channel throughout this document. It is possible that several channels share the same physical interface port. In structured CES mode neither SRTS nor ACM clock recovery is possible.
Data Sheet
39
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Functional Description
3.2
Functional Block Diagram
External RAM AAL Segmentation / AAL Reassembly Buffers ATM Transmit / ATM Receive Buffers Cell Insertion / Cell Extraction Buffers Statistics Counters, Threshold Timers
CV ICRC RB x8 RM JT
External Clock Recovery Interface
FR x8
Internal Clock Recovery Circuit
OR
RTS Buffer
External RAM Interface
CR Cell Receive Processing / AAL Segmentation IE Cell Insertion
JTAG Interface
UR
Framer Receive Interface
SL x8
Octet Receive Processing
OQ
Output Queue
Serial Loop
Cell Extraction FT x8 OT CT Cell Transmit Processing / AAL Reassembly
OM MP
Upstream/Downstream Loop
UT
Framer Transmit Interface
CK
Octet Transmit Processing
EQ
IQ
Clock & Reset
Event Queue
OAM Processing
Microprocessor Interface
Interrupt Queue
To Microprocessor
Figure 6
Block Diagram
Data Sheet
40
2002-05-06
Tx UTOPIA
Tx E1/T1
UTOPIA Transmit Interface
Rx UTOPIA
Rx E1/T1
UTOPIA Receive Interface
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Functional Description
3.3
Table 11 Block FR
Functional Block Description
Functions of IWE8 Blocks Functions Framer Receive interfaces * FRCLK synchronization * 8 bit serial to parallel conversion * Frame and multiframe synchronization * Timeslot counter * Timeslot assignment and channel configuration (RAM1) Octet Receive processing ATM ports: * Cell delineation * HEC check: Header error detection and correction * Cell payload de scrambling * Idle or Unassigned Cell Deletion * Statistics counter event generation * Write to ATM Receive Buffer AAL ports: * Segmentation port de correlation * Segmentation * SN/SNP generation * SDT pointer generation * RTS value insertion * Statistics counter event generation * Write to Segmentation Buffer Output Queue * FIFO containing 256 addresses of cells to be sent to UTOPIA Receive Cell Receive processing ATM ports: * Read cells from ATM receive buffer AAL ports: * Read cells from AAL segmentation buffer * Padding of partially filled cells UTOPIA Receive interface * Cell level handshake * Mapping of framer port number into ATM header in UTOPIA level 1 mode and UTOPIA level 2 single PHY mode * Output buffer for 4 cells
OR
OQ CR
UR
Data Sheet
41
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Functional Description Table 11 Block UL Functions of IWE8 Blocks Functions Upstream Loop * Cell loopback from Cell Receive to Cell Transmit processing * Loopback buffer for 4 cells Downstream Loop * Cell loopback from UTOPIA Transmit to UTOPIA Receive * Loopback buffer for 4 cells UTOPIA Transmit interface * Cell level handshake * Evaluation of framer port number from ATM header in UTOPIA level 1 mode and UTOPIA level 2 singel PHY mode * Input buffer for 4 cells Cell Transmit processing Port and channel identification ATM ports: * Write cells to ATM transmit buffer AAL ports: * Port and channel identification * SNP field check * SN field check * SDT pointer detection and verification * RTS value extraction * Extracting reassembly buffer filling for ACM * CAS processing * Statistics counter event generation * Insertion of dummy cells at cell loss * Write to Reassembly Buffer
DL
UT
CT
Data Sheet
42
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Functional Description Table 11 Block OT Functions of IWE8 Blocks Functions Octet Transmit processing ATM ports: * Reading octets from ATM Transmit Buffer * Cell rate de coupling: idle/unassigned cell insertion * Cell payload scrambling * HEC generation AAL ports: * Read octets from Reassembly Buffer * Handling of Reassembly Buffer Overflow * Handling of Reassembly Buffer underflow * Reassembly Buffer initialization to compensate CDV * Synchronization of AAL1 start of structure with synchronization pulse of framer port * Statistics counter event generation Framer Transmit interfaces * FTCLK synchronization * 8 bit parallel to serial conversion * Generation of frame and multiframe synchronization signals * Timeslot counter * Timeslot assignment and channel configuration (RAM2, RAM3) Serial Loop * Serial loopback from Framer Transmit to Framer Receive OAM processing * Processing of OAM counter events * Interrupt queue control * Microprocessor access control to external RAM Event Queue * FIFO of 256 OAM counter events Microprocessor interface * Synchronization of asynchronous microprocessor interface signals * Internal registers * Interrupt generation External RAM interface * Generation of external RAM interface signals * Generation of basic RAM cycle * Access control to external RAM for different blocks * Parity generation and checking
FT
SL OM
EQ MP
RM
Data Sheet
43
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Functional Description Table 11 Block CV Functions of IWE8 Blocks Functions External Clock Recovery interface * Generation of serial communication frames to external clock recovery circuit, containing RTS values and or ACM buffer filling * Generation of synchronization for RTS generation by external clock recovery circuit. * Reception of frames with RTS values from external clock recovery circuit RTS Buffer * Buffer for 2 incoming RTS values per port Clock & Reset * Clock distribution * Reset control JTAG interface * Boundary Scan register * TAP controller Internal Clock Recovery Circuit * Synchronous Residual Time Stamp SRTS * Adaptive Clock Method ACM ATM Transmit Buffer * Compensate packetization delay on the PDH interface. * Maximum size of 256 ATM cells per port. * Maximum size of 64 octets per ATM cell. ATM Receive Buffer * Maximum size of 16 ATM cells per port. * Maximum size of 64 octets per ATM cell. Segmentation Buffer * Compensate segmentation delay in the ATM network. * 1024 bytes per port (unstructured CES) * 256 bytes per timeslot (structured CES) Reassembly Buffer * Compensate the Cell Delay Variation (CDV) of the ATM network. * 512 bytes per timeslot. (structured CES)
RB CK
JT
ICRC
External RAM
Data Sheet
44
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4
4.1
Operational Description
ATM Transmit Functions
For ports configured to ATM mode the following data flow is valid: The Cell Transmit Processing block is responsible for: * Cell discarding * Write ATM cells except of UDF octet to ATM Transmit Buffer The Octet Transmit Processing block is responsible for: * * * * Reading octets from ATM Transmit Buffer Cell rate de-coupling: idle/unassigned cell insertion Cell payload scrambling HEC generation
The ATM transmit functions are controlled by the internal registers "catm", "atmc" and "txid". The features controlled by these registers are common to all ATM ports. Some features of the ATM transmit functions can be controlled per port, by programming the port specific "ATM Transmit Reference Slot" in the internal configuration RAM2
4.1.1 4.1.1.1
Operation ATM Transmit Buffer Filling Level
The amount of buffered data in transmit direction of each port is adjustable in granularity of bytes or cells. This allows a controlled transmission delay while maintaining a continuous ATM cell flow. The feature is implemented using the port specific back pressure mechanism of the UTOPIA interface (Chapter 5.2.2). The granularity and range of filling level are set independently per port in the "p_thr_m" bits of the Port Configuration Registers ("pcfN", see Chapter 7.1). The port specific threshold value is defined via the corresponding Threshold Port Register ("thrspN", see Chapter 7.38 to Chapter 7.41) 2 Modes are supported: * Mode 1 (p_thr_m = 01B) allows the definition of threshold values in the range of 0 to 255 cells. The actual value equals the contents of thrspN. * Mode 2 (p_thr_m = 10B) allows the definition of threshold values in the range of 0 to 222 bytes. The actual value equals 53 * C + B, with C representing the 2 most significant bits of thrspN and B representing the 6 least significant bits of thrspN. All other values of p_thr_m will switch off this feature and reset the internal counter. To avoid deadlock conditions, the contents of the common 8 cell UTOPIA input buffer will always be flushed into the port specific Transmit Buffers independent from their back
Data Sheet
45
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description pressure state. This results in two side effects, which have to be taken into account for the calculation of threshold values. * After back pressure state has been entered, up to 8 additional cells may be transferred from the UTOPIA input buffer to the port buffer. * Before a certain cell can cause port specific back pressure, it has to traverse the UTOPIA input buffer, resulting in a delay of 4.2 to 16.8 s.
4.1.1.2
Cell Discarding
The discarding of cells is available for ATM ports. It can depend on * Buffer filling level and CLP (Bit 0 of the 4th ATM header octet) * Buffer filling level and CLPI (Cell Loss Priority Internal, bit 6 of the UDF octet at the UTOPIA interface) The bit ENB, bit 5 of the UDF octet at the UTOPIA interface, is responsible for the decision if discarding shall base on CLP or CLPI. For bit locations see Figure 30. The buffer threshold for discarding cells is configured by register "thrshld" and applies to all ports. Cells that are going to be extracted via the microprocessor interface will be ignored by the cell discard mechanism Table 12 ENB 0 0 1 1 CLPI x x 0 1 ATM Cell Discarding CLP 0 1 x x Discarding No Yes, if buffer threshold has been exceeded No Yes, if buffer threshold has been exceeded
4.1.1.3
Cell rate de-coupling: Idle/Unassigned Cell Insertion
When the ATM Transmit Buffer of a port is empty, idle or unassigned cells are transmitted to provide cell rate de-coupling. Idle cells are transmitted as defined in the ITU-T I.361 [30]. Unassigned cells can be inserted, as defined in the B-ISDN UNI and NNI physical layer generic criteria [15]. The 4 MSBs of header octet 1 and the 4 LSBs of header octet 4 are programmable in the "prg_tx_hd" field of the TX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (txid, see Chapter 7.10). All other header bits will be 0.
Data Sheet
46
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
octet 1 octet 2 octet 3 octet 4
GFC[3:0]/VPI[11:8] = prg_tx_hd[7:4] VPI[3:0] = 0000B VCI[3:0] = 0000B
VPI[7:4] = 0000B VCI[15:12] = 0000B PTI[2:0] = prg_tx_hd[3:1] CLP = prg_tx_ hd[0]
VCI[11:4] = 0000_0000B
octet 5 octet 6 . octet 53
UDF prg_tx_pl[7:0] . prg_tx_pl[7:0]
* If idle cell insertion according to ITU-T I.361 or ITU-T I.432.1 is desired, the "prg_tx_hd" field of "txid" should be set to 0000_0001B. * If unassigned cell insertion at the NNI or uncontrolled UNI according to ITU-T I.361 is desired, the "prg_tx_hd" field of "txid" should be set to 0000 XXX0. For X any value is allowed. The payload of idle or unassigned cells consists of the same octet which is repeated 48 times. It is programmable by the "prg_tx_pl" field of the "txid" register. * For ITU-T I.432.1 compliant idle cells, the "prg_tx_pl" field of "txid" should be set to 0110_1010B. * The pre-assigned values of the information field of all unassigned cells are for further study (ITU-T I.361 [30])
4.1.1.4
Cell Payload Scrambling
ITU-T I.432.3 [34] recommends the self-synchronizing scrambler x43+1 for payload scrambling at E1 datarates. For T1 no scrambling is recommended. The scrambler function is implemented in the device. It can be disabled per port by the x43_scrambling bit in the "ATM Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM2.
4.1.1.5
HEC Generation
The HEC generation is implemented according to ITU-T I.432.1 [33] using the generator polynomial x8 + x2 + x + 1. To significantly improve the cell delineation performance in the case of bit-slips it is recommended that * the check bits are added (modulo 2) to an 8-bit pattern (coset) before being inserted in the last octet of the header. * the recommended pattern is "0101 0101".
Data Sheet
47
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description * the receiver must subtract (equal to add modulo 2) the same pattern from the 8 HEC bits before calculating the syndrome of the header. As an example, if the first 4 octets of the header were all zeros the generated header before scrambling would be "00000000_00000000_00000000_00000000_01010101". The starting value for the polynomial check is 0s (binary) The coset value is programmable in the ATM Control Register ("atmc", see Chapter 7.8).
4.1.2
Setup of ATM Transmit Ports
Each ATM transmit port can be configured in the "channel_mode" field of the "ATM Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM2 to operate in "Inactive", "Active" or "Standby" mode. In "Inactive" mode, byte-pattern 0 "bp0" is continuously sent to the framer transmit interface. In "Active" mode, user cells or idle/unassigned cells are sent to the framer transmit interface. In "Standby" mode, only idle/unassigned cells are sent to the framer transmit interface. When activating ATM transmit ports, it is important to follow the initialization sequence as shown in Table 13. Step 2 must be held at least 250 s to internally reset the ATM transmit port. During this time the device connected to the Framer Receive Interface has to be in normal operation allowing the IWE8 to synchronize itself on the frame pulse. Table 13 Step 1 2 3 Activation sequence for ATM transmit ports ATM Transmit Reference Slot. channel_mode 00 = Inactive 00 = Inactive 01 or 11 = Active 250 s Minimum Time
pcfN. p_tx_act 0 = inactive 1 = active 1 = active
Data Sheet
48
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.2
ATM Receive Functions
For ports configured to ATM mode the following data flow is valid: The Octet Receive Processing block is responsible for: * * * * * * Cell delineation HEC check: Header error detection and correction Cell payload de-scrambling Idle or Unassigned Cell Deletion Statistics counter event generation Write cells except of UDF octet to ATM Receive Buffer
The Cell Receive Processing block is responsible for: * Read cells from ATM Receive Buffer The ATM receive functions are controlled by the internal registers "catm", "atmc" and "rxid". The features controlled by these registers are common to all ATM ports. Some features can be controlled per port. They were configured by programming the port specific "ATM Receive Reference Slot" in the internal configuration RAM.
4.2.1 4.2.1.1
Operation Cell Delineation
The cell delineation algorithm is implemented according to the ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1 [33]. To support detection of "Out of Cell Delineation" (OCD) anomalies and "Loss of Cell Delineation" (LCD) defect, the IWE8 generates an interrupt in eis4 (Chapter 7.22) whenever the SYNC state is left or entered. The generation of interrupts is controllable on a per port basis through fields in the "ATM Receive Reference Slot" of RAM1 (Chapter 6.1.1.1). It is also possible to see the current state of the cell delineation FSM (Finite State Machine) in the Cell Delineation FSM Status Register ("cdfs", see Chapter 7.15). The software can then start a timer (e.g. timer_set_1 provided by the IWE8) to establish the LCD defect state. As octet boundaries are available within the receive physical layer prior to cell delineation, the cell delineation process is performed octet by octet in the HUNT state. As long as the cell delineation is not in the SYNC state, received octets are discarded. The ALPHA and DELTA parameters, which influence the robustness of the algorithm against false misalignment due to bit errors (ALPHA) and false delineation in the re synchronization process (DELTA), are programmable to values between 0 and 15 in the ATM Control Register (atmc, see Chapter 7.8), These settings are common for all ATM ports. ITU-T I.432.1 [33] recommends:
Data Sheet
49
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description * for the Cell-based Physical Layer, ALPHA = 7 and DELTA = 8. * for the Frame-based Physical Layer, ALPHA = 7 and DELTA = 6. * for other systems, values for ALPHA and DELTA are for further study.
Bit by bit
HUNT
Correct HEC
Incorrect HEC
PRESYNC
Cell by cell
ALPHA consecutive incorrect HEC DELTA consecutive correct HEC SYNC Cell by cell Note - The "correct HEC" means the header has no bit error (syndrome is zero) and has not been corrected
Figure 7
Cell delineation state diagram (Figure 5/I.432.1)
note 1 Working note 2 OCD anomally
note 3 LCD defect
note 4
note1 note2 note3 note4
Triggered by state transition (Case A) due to alpha consecutive incorrect HECs in the cell delineation process (Fig. 5 of ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1) Triggered by state transition (Case B) due to delta consecutive correct HECs in thecell delineation process (Fig. 5 of ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1) Triggered by 50 continuous ms in the OCD anomaly maintenance state Triggered by 50 continuous ms in the cell delineation "Sync" state (Fig.5 of ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1)"
Figure 8
Maintenance state transition diagram for cell delineation events (Figure 2/ I.432.3)
Data Sheet
50
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description The Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) state is entered whenever the Out of Cell (OCD) state is continuously active for more than an user defined period of time, ITU-T I.432.1 recommends a persistence time of 50ms. For each port a separate timer is implemented. All timers can be enabled via the lcd_en bit in the LCD Timer Register ("lcdtimer", see Chapter 7.43). The global preload value is defined by the "lcd_val" bits in lcdtimer. After expiration of each timer, an "lcd_start" interrupt is generated, indicated in the Interrupt Status Register 1 (isr1, see Chapter 7.18) and the Extended Interrupt Status Register 0 (eis0, see Chapter 7.42). If enabled, the timer is started at the transition from SYNC to OCD-state. After expiration LCD state is entered. Whenever the SYNC state is entered before the timer expires, the timer is reset. The transition from LCD to Working state follows the same procedure. If after the LCD state the SYNC state is entered again, the timer is started and after expiration the maintenance state machine is in working state again. In parallel an "lcd_end" interrupt is generated indicated in "isr1" and "eis0". If synchronization is lost again during the timer period, LCD state is reentered and the timer is reset. To force resynchronization of the cell delineation process, the microprocessor can force individual ports to enter the HUNT state, by setting the bit "go_hunt" in the corresponding "ATM Receive Reference Slot" of RAM1 (Chapter 6.1.1.1).
4.2.1.2
HEC Check: Header Error Detection and Correction
The Header Error Control (HEC) is implemented according to the ITU-T I.432.1 B-ISDN user-network interface - Physical layer specification [33]. According to the HEC algorithm, cells are discarded when a multi-bit header error is detected in the Correction mode or a header error is detected in the Detection mode. According to the HEC algorithm, cells are corrected when a single-bit error is detected in the Correction mode.
.
Multi-bit error detected (Cell discarded) No error detected (No action) Corrrection Mode No error detected (No action) Single-bit error detected (Correction) Detection Mode Error detected (Cell discarded)
Figure 9
HEC: Receiver mode of Operation (Figure 3/ITU I.432.1)
The pure HEC detection mode as recommended by the ATM Forum is selectable via bit "a_hec_algor" in register acfg (see Chapter 7.2)
Data Sheet
51
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
.
No error detected
Detection Mode
Error detected Cell discarded
Figure 10
HEC Detection According to ATM Forum
No discarding of HEC errored cells as an option is available and selectable via bit "a_hec_mode" in the register acfg (Chapter 7.2). In this case an errored HEC is indicated by setting the most significant bit in the UDF field at the UTOPIA receive interface.
4.2.1.3
Cell Payload Descrambling
ITU-T I.432.3 [34] recommends the self-synchronizing scrambler x43+1 for payload scrambling at E1 datarates. For T1 no scrambling is recommended. The self-synchronizing scrambler function is implemented in the device. It can be disabled per port by the x43_descrambling bit in the "ATM Receive Reference Slot" in RAM1.
4.2.1.4
Idle, Physical Layer or Unassigned Cell Deletion
According to ITU-T I.361 [30], idle cells, physical layer OAM cells and cells reserved for use by the physical layer are not passed to the ATM layer at the UNI.
Data Sheet
52
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description Octet 1 Idle cell identification (Notes 1 and 2) Physical OAM cell identification (Note 2) layer Reserved for use of the physical layer (Notes 1, 2 and 3) 0000/0000 0000/0000 PPPP/0000 Octet 2 0000/0000 0000/0000 0000/0000 Octet 3 0000/0000 0000/0000 0000/0000 Octet 4 0000/0001 0000/1001 0000/PPP1
P: Indicates the bit is available for use by the physical layer Values assigned to these but have no meaning with respect to the fields occupying the corresponding bit positions at the ATM layer Notes: 1 In the case of physical layer cells, the bit in the location of the CLP indication is not used for the CLP mechanism as specified in 3.4.2.3.2/I.150. 2 Cells having header values which are identified as idle, physical layer OAM, and reserved for use by the physical layer are not passed to the ATM layer from the physical layer. 3 Specific pre-assigned physical layer cell header values are given in Recommendation I.432
Figure 11
Pre-assigned cell header values at the UNI for use by the physical layer (excluding the HEC field) (Table 1/I.361)
In contrast to this the ATM-Forum recommends in the User-network interface specification that the receiving ATM entity is responsible for extraction and discarding of unassigned and idle cells. Use invalid unassigned
X: Indicates "don't care" bits
Octet 1 XXXX/0000 0000/0000
Octet 2 0000/0000 0000/0000
Octet 3 0000/0000 0000/0000
Octet 4 0000/XXX1 0000/XXX0
Figure 12
Pre-defined header field values [11]
The RX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (rxid, see Chapter 7.9) can be used in order to achieve ITU-T or ATM-Forum compliance. The 4 MSBs of header octet 1 and the 4 LSBs of header octet 4 of the received cells to be discarded are programmable in bits "prg_rx_hd". All other header bits must be 0. On top the "msk_rx_hd" field of "rxid" allows to mask all or some of these bits. The masked bits are considered as "don't care". * If ITU-T I.361 compliance is desired, the "prg_rx_hd" field should be set to 0000 0001. If only idle cells should be deleted, the "msk_rx_hd" should be set to 0000 0000.
Data Sheet
53
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description If all physical layer cells should be deleted, the "msk_rx_hd" should be set to 1111 1110. * For ATM Forum compliance, the "prg_rx_hd" field should be set to 0000 0000. The "msk_rx_hd" should be set to 1111 1110. This configuration will delete all unassigned cells. The deletion of idle, physical layer or unassigned cells can be enabled or disabled per port by "delete_idle_cells" in the "ATM Receive Reference Slot" of RAM1 (Chapter 6.1.1.1).
4.2.2
Setup of ATM Receive Ports
Each ATM receive port can be configured in the "channel_mode" field of the "ATM Receive Reference Slot" in RAM1 to operate in "Inactive", "Active" or "Standby" mode. In "Inactive" mode, no data is accepted from the framer receive interface. In "Active" mode, data is accepted from the framer receive interface, cells are written into the ATM Receive Buffer and cell addresses are written into the Output Queue. In "Standby" mode, data is accepted from the framer receive interface but no cells are written into the ATM Receive Buffer or the Output Queue. This mode can be used to test the cell delineation. When activating ATM receive ports, it is important to follow the initialization sequence as shown in Table 14. Step 2 must be held at least 250 s to internally reset the ATM receive port. During this time the device connected to the Framer Transmit Interface has to be in normal operation allowing the IWE8 to synchronize itself on the frame pulse. Table 14 Step 1 2 3 Activation sequence for ATM receive ports ATM Receive Reference Slot. channel_mode 00 = Inactive 00 = Inactive 01 or 11 = Active 250 s Minimum Time
pcfN. p_rx_act 0 = inactive 1 = active 1 = active
Data Sheet
54
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.3
AAL Segmentation Functions
This function implements the Convergency Sublayer for Structured Data Transfer (SDT) and Unstructured Data Transfer as well as the Segmentation Sublayer for AAL type 1 as described in ITU-T recommendation I.363.1 [31]. The structure of AAL1 SAR-PDU is shown in Chapter 12. The Octet Receive Processing block is responsible for: * * * * * * * Segmentation port decorrelation Segmentation SN/SNP generation SDT pointer generation RTS value insertion Statistics counter event generation Write to Segmentation Buffer
The Cell Receive Processing block is responsible for:
* Read cells from Segmentation Buffer * Padding of partially filled cells
4.3.1 4.3.1.1
Operation Segmentation Port Decorrelation
In synchronous systems, the microprocessor may activate a number of channels consecutively, in phase with the segmentation period of a particular channel, causing a large number of cells to be generated within the same 125 sec period. This would result in a large number of cells residing in the Output Queue and increase the Cell Delay Variation (CDV). To avoid this, a decorrelation circuit has been implemented in the "Octet Receive processing" (OR), that inserts a random waiting period between activation of a channel and start of cell segmentation. This feature can be activated by setting bit "dcor" in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot" of the channel in RAM1. Otherwise segmentation is started as soon as the channel has been activated by the microprocessor (field "channel_mode") The decorrelation circuit consists of a free-running 5-bit counter at a frequency of FCLOCK/ 3360 (7.5 KHz if FCLOCK= 25 MHz) a register containing a random number (bits "dcor_random_nr") and a comparator. Each time an octet for this channel is received the counter is compared with the random value. Only when both values are equal, segmentation is started. When using the decorrelation circuit make sure that the random number is written to the "dcor_random_nr" field of the "AAL Receive Reference Slot" before activating the channel with "channel_mode"
Data Sheet
55
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description In SDT mode, the cells are segmented when the first (multi) frame synchronization pulse after segmentation start is received from the framer receive interface of that channel. The resulting SC value and pointer field of the first cell transmitted will both be 0.
4.3.1.2
Segmentation
The segmentation and reassembly function can be programmed to use, alternatively to the standard AAL type 1 SAR-PDU, a SAR-PDU that is referred to as AAL type 0 and consists of 48 octets payload without any overhead. The selection is done by programming the "AAL0" field in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot". AAL Type 0 Figure 13 shows the AAL type 0 SAR-PDU. It is possible to fill only part of the SAR-PDU payload with User Information octets by programming field "part_fill" in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot" of RAM1 to values smaller than 48.
A A L user info
N o cte ts
D um m y Fill
A TM H eader
5 o cte ts SAR SDU PDU = S e g m e n ta tio n & R ea sse m b ly = S e rvice D a ta U n it = P ro to co l D a ta U n it
A TM -S D U = S A R -P D U
4 8 o cte ts
A TM Layer
Figure 13
SAR-PDU of AAL Type 0
AAL Type 1 SDT Structure Length For Structured Circuit Emulation Service as defined by the ATM-Forum in "Circuit Emulation Services Version 2.0" [10] Structured Data Transfer (SDT) is used. The structure length used for SDT in ATM cells is: *N when frame-based SDT is selected * N x 16 when CRC multiframe-based SDT is selected for E1 ports * N x 24 when superframe-based SDT or extended superframe-based SDT is selected for T1 ports. The selection between frame-based or multiframe-based SDT is done by the bit "sdt_mfs" in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot".
4.3.1.3
Transport of the Framer Port Number
If the UTOPIA interface is configured for level 2 MPHY mode, the framer port number is transported via the UTOPIA address bits. In UTOPIA level 1 and UTOPIA level 2 single PHY mode the framer port number is mapped into the ATM Header (see Chapter 5.2.3).
Data Sheet 56 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.3.1.4
Transport of CAS Information
The four CAS bits for each time slot are transported within one multiframe from the framer to the IWE8. A signalling buffer in the internal RAM (256 x 4 x 2bit) holds the CAS bits from the framer interface. The activation of CAS packetization can be done via "p_cas" in the register "pcfN". The CAS bits will be packed in a signalling substructure after the payload of one multiframe has been packetized.
4.3.1.5
CAS Conditioning and Freezing Upstream
Normally the framer device is responsible for signalling freezing or signalling conditioning in case of line failure. If the framer doesn't support the feature the IWE8 can also fulfill the requirements according to Bellcore TR-NWT-000170 [14]. Pin "FRLOS = 1" indicates that the CAS information from the framer device is invalid and CAS conditioning or freezing upstream is starting. This state remains active until valid CAS bits are available indicated by "FRLOS = 0". CAS freezing means that the last valid CAS information is repeated as long as the error cause exists. In case of CAS conditioning for each timeslot individual CAS conditioning nibbles are sent instead. Selection between both procedures is done by setting "sig_cond" in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot". If the channel bandwidth is one slot, the signalling conditioning nibbles are defined in the field "next_slot_nr" of the "AAL Receive Reference Slot". If the channel bandwidth is more than one slot, the signalling conditioning nibbles are defined in the "sig_cond_nibble" of the "AAL Receive Continuation Slot". In the latter case the signalling conditioning nibbles defined in the first "AAL Receive Continuation Slot" are used for the first two slots. Table 15 Slot Number 1 2 3 Definition of the CAS Signalling Conditioning Nibbles. Channel Bandwidth = 1 Slot "next_slot_nr" of the "AAL Receive Reference Slot" Channel Bandwidth >= 2 Slots "sig_cond_nibble" of the first "AAL Receive Continuation Slot" "sig_cond_nibble" of the first "AAL Receive Continuation Slot" "sig_cond_nibble" of the second "AAL Receive Continuation Slot" "sig_cond_nibble" of the N-1th "AAL Receive Continuation Slot"
N
-
Data Sheet
57
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.3.1.6
Segmentation Buffer
The Segmentation Buffer is located in external RAM providing 256 bytes of memory for each timeslot, totalling to 64 KB for 8 ports with 32 timeslots each. The buffer for each timeslot consists of 4 blocks with 64 octets: Buffer size = 8 Ports x 32 Channels x 4 Blocks x 64 Octets In unstructured CES mode, one Segmentation Buffer per port provides 16 blocks. In structured CES mode, a Segmentation Buffer per channel with a variable capacity depending on the number of channels and the cell filling level is automatically configured by the IWE8. The number of memory blocks depends on the bandwidth of the channel. Thus for structured CES with N x 64-kbit/s there are N x 4 blocks per connection. Each channel can occupy 1, 2 or 4 block-groups (4, 8 or 16 blocks). The first block-group defines the reference slot number of the channel. The second, third and fourth blockgroups define the number of the corresponding interface slot of the channel. The one-to-one relationship between timeslots and groups of memory blocks allows dynamic re-configuration of a specific channel without disturbing other channels of the same port. Table 16 Cell Filling AAL0 (octets) 25-48 4-24 Relationship between Cell Filling and Segmentation Buffer Subblock Size Cell Filling AAL1, no SDT (octets) 25-47 4-24 Cell Filling AAL1, with SDT (octets) 25-47 4-24 Octets per block Cells per block Octets per cell [1]
64 64
1 2
64 32
4.3.1.7
Padding Partially Filled Cells
The value, used for dummy fill of partially filled cells, is programmable in the Cell Fill Register for Partially Filled Cells ("cfil", see Chapter 7.12). The fill octets carry no information and are ignored at the receiver. Table 17 shows valid values for the cell filling level, which can be configured in the field part_fill of RAM1: AAL Receive Reference Slot (see Chapter 6.1.1.3) and RAM2: AAL Transmit Reference Slot (see Chapter 6.1.2.3). All other values are illegal.
Data Sheet
58
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description Table 17 Cell Filling level values Partially Filled Minimum 4 4 4+Cb2) Maximum 47 46 46 48 471) 471) Completely Filled
ATM Adaptation Layer Type AAL0 AAL1 AAL1 with CAS
1) 2)
P format, cell may have only 46 user data octets in non-P format Cb: Required bytes for the CAS subblock in an ATM cell = RoundUp(N/2)
4.3.2
Setup of AAL Segmentation Channels
In "Inactive" mode, no data is accepted from the framer receive interface. In "Active" mode, data is accepted from the framer receive interface, segmented and cells are written into the Segmentation Buffers and the Output Queue. In "Standby" mode, data is accepted from the framer receive interface but no cells are written in the Segmentation Buffers. In "Substitute" mode, data is accepted from the framer receive interface, but substituted by a programmable byte-pattern selected by "subst_bpslct" in the "AAL Receive Reference Slot". Cells are written into the Segmentation Buffers and the Output Queue. This mode can be used for trunc conditioning to indicate idle (bit pattern = Ox7F) or outof-service conditions (bit pattern = Ox1A) according to af-vtoa-0078 [10] and TR-NWT000170 [14] When activating the AAL segmentation channels, it is important to follow the initialization sequence as shown in Table 18. Step 2 must be held at least 250 s to internally reset the AAL channel. During this time the device connected to the Framer Receive Interface has to be in normal operation allowing the IWE8 to synchronize itself on the frame pulse. Table 18 Step 1 2 3 Activation sequence for AAL segmentation channels AAL Receive Reference Slot. channel_mode 00 = Inactive 00 = Inactive 01 or 11 = Active 250 s Minimum Time
pcfN p_rx_act 0 = inactive 1 = active 1 = active
The RTS value stored in the RTS buffer of the port is loaded from the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit ICRC or from the Clock Recovery Interface. A new value will be
Data Sheet
59
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description provided by the ICRC once every cycle of 8 cells. To guarantee that the value stored in the RTS buffer of the port is correct, the procedure indicated in Figure 14 is followed.
Start of Segmentation
1st Cycle of 8 Cells; Dummy RTS Value Transmitted 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2nd Cycle of 8 Cells; Dummy RTS Value Transmitted
3rd Cycle of 8 Cells; 1st RTS Value Transmitted
Reset of RTS generator
1st RTS Value Received
2nd RTS Value Received
Figure 14
Synchronization of SRTS Generation with the Start of Segmentation
After the start of segmentation, during the 1st cycle of 8 cells, the RTS generator of the corresponding port is reset. If an external clock recovery circuit is used, it is reset by writing a reset frame for the corresponding port on the Clock Recovery Interface. During this cycle a dummy RTS value is transmitted. During the 2nd cycle of 8 cells, the IWE8 expects to receive the first valid RTS value while transmitting a dummy RTS value. During the following cycles of 8 cells the RTS value received in the previous cycle will be transmitted. The dummy RTS value is programmable with "a_dummy_srts" in the register "acfg" and is common for all ports. It must be programmed before the a_crv_en bit in "acfg" is made active. Otherwise the first 2 RTS values transmitted will be fixed at "0000". If the ICRC does not provide new RTS values to the RTS Transmit Buffer (buffer underflow), the last received value is repeated. If too many RTS values are provided (buffer overflow), the values in excess will be omitted and a "rts_overflow" bit in the Extended Interrupt Status Register 2 "eis2" is set.
Data Sheet
60
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.4
AAL Reassembly Functions
When AAL type 0 is enabled in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot", the SAR-PDU and SAR-SDU processing is disabled. When AAL type 0 is disabled in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot", the SAR-PDU header is processed according to AAL type 1 as defined in ITU-T I.363.1 [31]. For ports configured to AAL mode the following data flow is valid: The cell transmit processing block is responsible for: * * * * * * * * * Port and channel identification SNP field check SN field check SDT pointer detection and verification SRTS value extraction CAS processing Statistics counter event generation Insertion of dummy cells at cell loss Write to Reassembly Buffer
The octet transmit processing block is responsible for:
* * * * * *
Read octets from Reassembly Buffer Handling of Reassembly Buffer Overflow Handling of Reassembly Buffer underflow Reassembly Buffer initialization to compensate CDV Synchronization of SDT structure with port structure Statistics counter event generation
4.4.1 4.4.1.1
Operation Port and Channel Identification
Before an incoming cell is processed, it is determined to which port and channel the cell is destined. This information is retrieved from the UTOPIA interface (see Chapter 5.2.3).
4.4.1.2
Sequence Number Protection field check
When an un-correctable multi-bit error is detected the Sequence Number (SN) field of the SAR-PDU header is declared invalid, otherwise the SN field is valid. The function can be enabled or disabled by the bit "snp_check" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot". If disabled the SN of all incoming cells are declared valid.
Data Sheet
61
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.4.1.3
Sequence Number field check
This function implements the sequence number processing. It can be enabled via bit "sn_check" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot". If enabled, selection can be made between Robust and Fast Sequence Count Algorithm as defined in the ITU-T I.363.1 [31] by "sn_fast" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot". If SN check is disabled, all cells are accepted, no cells are discarded, lost and misinserted cells are not detected.
4.4.1.4
RTS Extraction and Verification
When the clock recovery verification is enabled ("crv_en" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot"), and the port is configured for SRTS ("p_rts" = 1), RTS values are extracted and verified. The RTS value consists of the four CSI bits of the cells with odd SC values within a cycle of 8 cells. A RTS value is accepted as correct if the following condition is true: * The SN field is valid * Four consecutive odd SC values (1, 3, 5 or 7) were received in the previous cycle of 8 cells Otherwise the dummy RTS-value is used. When the start of a new cycle is detected, the RTS value of the previous cycle is written to the ICRC.
4.4.1.5
Pointer Field Detection and Verification
When SDT is enabled ("sdt" = 1 in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot"), it is assumed that the channel is using Structured Data Transfer. The SAR-PDU payload is supposed to be of the P format under the following conditions: * The SN field is valid * Even SC value (0, 2, 4 or 6) * The CSI field = 1 When the "sdt_once" bit in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" is set to 1, only the first cell with CSI bit = 1 in a cycle of 8 cells is supposed to contain a P format SAR-SDU. The other cells with CSI bit = 1 within the same cycle are treated as non-P format. This operation is recommended by ITU-T I.363.1 [31] In the cells that are supposed to contain a P format SAR-SDU, the pointer field is verified and accepted under the following conditions: * The parity bit is correct as defined in the ITU-T I.363.1 [31] * The value of the offset field is between 0 and 93 or is the dummy value 127. If an invalid pointer field (93 < pointer < 127) is detected, its content is replaced by the dummy value (127). The SAR-SDU is processed as if it would have been received with a dummy pointer value. The P format of the SAR-PDU payload is assumed and the first octet of the SAR-PDU payload is not processed as user information.
Data Sheet 62 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description The bit "sdt_par" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" allows to disable the verification of the parity bit in the pointer field. For multiframe based SDT the bit "sdt_mfs" in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" has to be set.
4.4.1.6
CAS Conditioning and Freezing Downstream
An internal signalling buffer holds the CAS bits. In case of buffer underflow or pointer mismatch the IWE8 provides downstream CAS conditioning and freezing according to Bellcore TR-NWT-000170 [14]. The selection between both is done individually for each channel via Bit "cond_en" in the "AAL Transmit Conditioning Slot" of RAM4. Values for conditioning can be selected via the "cond_down_nibble" bits in the same register. The spare and alarm indication bits of the first E1 frame can be programmed by setting bits cas0portN in the registers "cas1" and "cas2". The CAS information of idle time slots can be chosen by setting bits in the register "cas3".
4.4.1.7
Insertion of Dummy Cells at Cell Loss
Upon cell loss detection, the sequence count algorithm will insert dummy cells into the Reassembly Buffer to maintain bit count integrity. The maximum amount of consecutively inserted cells is 6. These dummy cells are physically inserted when reading the Reassembly Buffer. The Reassembly Buffer itself contains only control field in front of the payload of the next accepted cell, indicating the amount of dummy cells to be inserted. Inserted dummy cells are not taken into account for the ACM Reassembly Buffer filling level calculation. This means that the buffer filling level is incorrect as long as dummy cells are physically inserted. The data octet used for the dummy cells is the byte-pattern selected by the "starv_bpslct" field of the "AAL transmit reference slot" of RAM3.
4.4.1.8
Reassembly Buffer
The purpose of the Reassembly Buffer is to compensate the Cell Delay Variation (CDV) of the ATM network. It is located in external RAM providing 512 byte of memory for each timeslot, totalling to 128 KB for 8 ports with 32 timeslots each. The buffer for each timeslot consists of 8 memory blocks with 64 octets: Buffer size = 8 Ports x 32 Channels x 8 Blocks x 64 Octets [2]
Data Sheet
63
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description The number of memory blocks used depends on the bandwidth of the channel (N*64kbit/s). Thus for structured CES with N*64-kbit/s there are N x 8 memory blocks per connection. The one-to-one relationship between timeslots and groups of memory blocks allows dynamic re-configuration of a specific channel without disturbing other channels of the same port.
4.4.1.9
Handling of Reassembly Buffer Overflow
Overflow is detected when, at the moment of storing an accepted cell, the extra payload of the new cell in the buffer would exceed the logical size of the Reassembly Buffer. For AAL type 1 two possible actions exist: * The cell is discarded. Re-initialization of the Reassembly Buffer as described in Chapter 4.4.2.4 is in line with the ITU-T I.361.1 [31] * The cell is accepted but the Reassembly Buffer is automatically re-initialized. Re-initialization is done automatically without disturbing the microprocessor. The action chosen is determined by the "auto_reinit_of" field in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM3. When using AAL type 0, the accepted cell is considered to be a misinserted cell and rejected.
4.4.1.10 Handling of Reassembly Buffer Underflow
An underflow period is detected when no octets are available in the Reassembly Buffer to be passed to the framer transmit interface. During the underflow period starvation octets are passed to the framer transmit interface and Statistics Counter 12 increments if enabled. For AAL type 1, the underflow is considered to be caused by an extremely late cell. The length of the underflow period is measured by counting the number of transmitted starvation octets, expressed as a number of starvation cells that are counted by Statistics Counter 13 if enabled For resolving the underflow two possibilities exist: * Manual re-initialization: Re-initialization of the Reassembly Buffer as described in Chapter 4.4.2.4 is in line with the ITU-T I.361.1 [31] * Automatic re-initialization: As soon as start of underflow is detected, the Reassembly Buffer is re-initialized without disturbing the microprocessor. Thus, the underflow status for the device is no longer valid although the underflow condition still exists. No starvation cells due to underflow will be inserted and counter 13 will not increment
Data Sheet 64 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description The action chosen is determined by the "auto_reinit_uf" field in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM3. For AAL type 0 the detection of an underflow period is considered to be the detection of cell loss. For this reason a dummy cell is inserted. The inserted dummy cell must be reflected in the buffer filling level of the Reassembly Buffer.
4.4.1.11 Synchronization of SDT Structure with Port Structure
In normal operation the "ATM start of structure" is synchronized with the "Port start of structure". Since this synchronization may get lost, the coincidence of both events is monitored. If they do mismatch, a two bit error counter is incremented. Upon reaching a programmable threshold, the Reassembly Buffer is re-initialized and Statistics Counter 14 is incremented if enabled. The threshold value is programmed in the "sdt_oos_nr" field of the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM2. If the Statistics Counter 14 should reflect "atmfCESPointerReframes" as defined in [10], "sdt_oos_nr" should be set to "00". To compensate cell loss the Sequence Count algorithm inserts dummy cells filled with starvation octets. In case the cell filling level is 46 octets or less, the bit count integrity won't be violated as the length of the AAL-user information within one SAR-SDU is always the same. When operating with a cell-filling of 47 octets, the AAL-user information maybe 47 octet in case of non-P format or 46 octet in case of P format SARPDU. As the information on the lost cell's SAR-PDU format is not available, it is possible that an excess of starvation octets is transmitted. As a result, the "ATM start of structure" might be out of phase with the "Port start of structure". The following procedure is implemented for re-synchronization: * At the end of expanding a burst of dummy cells a flag is set, indicating that a phase shift might occur. The maximum phase shift is 2 octets (e.g. 2 cells with pointers are lost within a sequence of eight cells) * When an "ATM start of structure" is received and a positive phase shift is detected lower than or equal to 2 octets, an equal number of octets is deleted in the Reassembly Buffer and the flag is reset. * When the detected phase shift is larger than the allowed value or negative the flag is reset and the Reassembly Buffer is re-initialized. * When no phase shift is detected the flag is reset.
4.4.2 4.4.2.1
Setup Setup of Reassembly Channels
Each AAL transmit channel can be configured in the "channel_mode" field of the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" to operate in "Inactive", "Standby" or "Active" mode.
Data Sheet
65
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description * In "Inactive" mode, no cells are accepted from the "UTOPIA Transmit interface", and byte-pattern 0 is sent to the framer transmit interface. * In "Standby" mode, cells are accepted from the "UTOPIA Transmit interface", but bytepattern 0 is sent to the framer transmit interface. * In "Active" mode, cells are accepted from the "UTOPIA Transmit interface", and user data octets are sent to the framer transmit interface. When activating the AAL reassembly channels, it is important to follow the initialization sequence as shown in Table 19. Step 2 must be held at least 250 s to internally reset the AAL channel. During this time the device connected to the Framer Transmit Interface has to be in normal operation allowing the IWE8 to synchronize itself on the frame pulse. Table 19 Step 1 2 3 Activation sequence for AAL reassembly channels AAL Transmit Reference Slot. channel_mode 00 = Inactive 00 = Inactive 01 or 11 = Active 250 s Minimum Time
pcfN. p_tx_act 0 = inactive 1 = active 1 = active
4.4.2.2
Physical Reassembly Buffer Size
Based on the cell filling level, AAL type and use of SDT, a memory block can be divided into subblocks, where the user data octets of a single cell are stored. The size of the memory subblock per Reassembly Buffer is automatically adapted. Table 20 shows this relationship. Table 20 Cell Filling AAL0 (octets) 33-48 17-32 9-16 4-8 Relationship between Cell Filling and Reassembly Buffer Subblock Size Cell Filling AAL1, no SDT (octets) 32-47 16-31 8-15 4-7 Cell Filling AAL1, with SDT (octets) 31-47 15-30 7-14 4-6 Octets per block Cells per block Octets per cell
64 64 64 64
1 2 4 8
64 32 16 8
The physical Reassembly Buffer size used for a N x 64 kbit/s connection is given by: Physical Size(octets) = N x 8 x Cell Filling x Cells per Block. [3]
Data Sheet
66
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.4.2.3
Initialization of the Reassembly Buffer
Before a channel is activated, the Reassembly Buffer must be configured properly to compensate Cell Delay Variation (CDV). In order to avoid buffer underflow due to large cell distances the amount of initial starvation octets that are passed to the framer interface upon arrival of the first cell needs to be set. On the other hand this number needs to be as small as possible to avoid excessive delay. The logical Reassembly Buffer size can be adjusted in order to detect too small cell distances by Reassembly Buffer overflow. All parameters are defined in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM3. The amount of starvation octets given to the framer transmit interface after arrival of the first cell is defined by "starv_ini". The contents of the starvation octets can be defined by "starv_bpslct" and the logical Reassembly Buffer size can be configured with "buff_lsize". The following sections give an overview on the Reassembly Buffer operation and initialization. Unstructured Data Transfer: After activation of a channel both SAR Receiver and Framer Transmit Interface start operation. As long as no reassembled cell is available in the Reassembly Buffer it is considered to be in underflow condition and starvation octets are passed to the Framer Transmit Interface. As soon as the first reassembled cell is available in the Reassembly Buffer the device starts building up the Reassembly Buffer threshold level. This is done by passing an additional amount of starvation octets to the framer Transmit Interface
Reassembly Buffer Filling Level [octets] buff_lsize Example: part_fill = 16 octets N = 16 no CDV
4 0 Framer Interf. Time Time T0 T0+TS T0+T T0: First cell arrival time TS: (starv_ini+1) * 125s / N T: Average cell distance T0+2*T
Starvation octets Data octets
Figure 15
Reassembly Buffer Initialization: No CDV
Data Sheet
67
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description As the transmission of the reassembled cell stream is delayed by "starv_ini"+1 octets, there will be "starv_ini"+1 octets of the previous cell left in the Reassembly Buffer if the following cell arrives without CDV. If the maximum positive CDV is the same as the maximum negative CDV the expectation interval has a length of 2 x CDV. Assuming N octets of data are transmitted within one frame period of 125s the amount of data transmitted in this interval is: N = 2 x CDV x -------------125s [4]
The worst case for buffer underflow is given if the first cell has maximum positive CDV.
Reassembly Buffer Filling Level [octets] buff_lsize Example: part_fill = 16 octets; N = 16 1st cell has max. pos. CDV = 15,625s 2nd cell has max. neg. CDV = -15,625s
4 0 Framer Interf. T0 T0-CDV+TS T0-CDV Starvation octets Data octets T0+T T0+T+CDV T0: First cell arrival time (theoretical) TS: (starv_ini + 1) * 125s / N T: Average cell distance T0+2*T T0+2*T-CDV Time Time
Figure 16
Reassembly Buffer Initialization: positive CDV at Start Up
In this case the amount of starvation octets inserted after receipt of the first cell has to be bigger than the amount of data transmitted during the expectation interval. Otherwise the Reassembly Buffer will enter underflow condition at any time a cell with maximum positive CDV is followed by a cell with maximum negative CDV. N starvini - 1 = 2 x CDV x -------------- - 1 0 125s [5]
The worst case for buffer overflow is given if the first cell has maximum negative CDV and then any cell with maximum negative CDV is followed by a cell with maximum positive CDV.
Data Sheet
68
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
Reassembly Buffer Filling Level [octets] buff_lsize Example: part_fill = 16 octets; N = 16 1st cell has max. neg. CDV = 15,625s 2nd cell has max. pos. CDV = -15,625s
4 0 Framer Interf. T0+T T0+CDV+TS T0+T-CDV T0+CDV T0: First cell arrival time (theoretical) TS: (starv_ini + 1) * 125s / N Starvation octets Data octets T: Average cell distance T0 T0+2*T T0+2*T+CDV Time Time
Figure 17
Reassembly Buffer Initialization: Negative CDV at Start Up
If the first cell has maximum negative CDV there will be "starv_ini" + 1 octets left in the Reassembly Buffer when the following cell arrives with maximum negative CDV. In case the following cell arrives with maximum positive CDV it will be "starv_ini" + 1 plus the amount of data to be transmitted in the expectation interval. Just after cell arrival the filling level of the Reassembly Buffer is at its maximum: N bufflsize partfill + starvini + 1 + = partfill + 4 x CDV x -------------125s The delay introduced by the Reassembly Buffer is: starvini x 125s delay = ----------------------------------------N Structured Data Transfer: After activation of a channel both SAR Receiver and Framer Transmit Interface start operation. As long as no reassembled cell in P format is accepted the Reassembly Buffer it is considered to be in underflow condition and starvation octets are passed to the Framer Transmit Interface. After that, "starv_ini" + 1 starvation octets are given to the Framer Transmit Interface. Then, the transmitter reads as many octets from the Reassembly Buffer as indicated by the pointer field. For each octet one starvation octet is given to the Framer Transmit Interface. The next octet to be read from the Reassembly Buffer is the "ATM Start of Structure" (The octet where the AAL1 pointer field points at). After that, starvation octets are passed to the Framer Transmit Interface until the "Port Start of Structure" is detected. A "Port Start of Structure" occurs when the Framer
Data Sheet 69 2002-05-06
[6]
[7]
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description Transmit Interface requests the first time-slot octet belonging to the channel in the frame or the multiframe. From that moment on, the "ATM Start of Structure" and "Port Start of Structure" are synchronous and the contents of the Reassembly Buffer are passed to the framer transmit interface. The worst case for buffer underflow is given, if the first cell has maximum positive CDV, the contents of the pointer field is "0" and the "Port Start of Structure" occurs right after the transmission of "starv_ini" + 1 starvation octets.
Reassembly Buffer Filling Level [octets] buff_lsize Example: part_fill = 16 octets; N = 16 1st cell has max. pos. CDV = 15,625s 2nd cell has max. neg. CDV = -15,625s
4 0 Framer Interf. T0 T0-CDV+TS T0-CDV Port Start of Structure ATM Start of Structure Starvation octets Data octets T0: First cell arrival time (theoretical) TS: (starv_ini + 1) * 125s / N T: Average cell distance T0+T T0+T+CDV T0+2*T T0+2*T-CDV Time Time
Figure 18
Reassembly Buffer Initialization for structured CES: positive CDV at Start Up
In this case the amount of starvation octets inserted after receipt of the first P format cell has to be bigger than the amount of data transmitted during the expectation interval as defined in (4). Otherwise the Reassembly Buffer will enter underflow condition at any time a cell with maximum positive CDV is followed by a cell with maximum negative CDV. 2 x CDV x N starvini - 1 = -------------------------------- - 1 0 125s [8]
The worst case for buffer overflow is given, if the first P format cell has maximum negative CDV, the contents of the pointer field is at its maximum value Pmax and the "Port Start of Structure" occurs right before the receipt of that P format cell. In that case the complete frame needs to be stored in the Reassembly Buffer If the first cell has maximum negative CDV there will be "starv_ini" + 1 octets left in the Reassembly Buffer at any time a cell with maximum positive CDV is followed by a cell
Data Sheet
70
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description with maximum negative CDV. the following cell arrives with maximum negative CDV. In case the following cell arrives with maximum positive CDV it will be "starv_ini" + 1 plus the amount of data to be transmitted in the expectation interval. Just after cell arrival the filling level of the Reassembly Buffer is at its maximum: To allow CDV compensation and SDT structure synchronization, the logical size should be programmed to a minimum value given by: bufflsize partfill + starvini + 1 + + FR x N + Pmax N bufflsize partfill + 4 x CDV x -------------- + FR x N + Pmax 125s with FR being the number of frames in a structure: FR = 0: when SDT is not used FR = 1: for frame based SDT FR = 16: for multi-frame based SDT in E1 mode FR = 24: for multi-frame based SDT in T1 mode Pmax is the maximum number of payload octets from the pointer field to the start of structure: Pmax = N x FR, if N x FR < 2 x part_fill Pmax = 2 x part_fill, if N x FR > 2 x part_fill The logical Reassembly Buffer size is limited by its physical size. The relation is given by: bufflsize 8 x N x partfill x cellsperblock - S x partfill where S = 0: in case of Fast Sequence Count Algorithm S = 1: in case of Robust Sequence Count Algorithm When the robust SC algorithm is used, the decision on cell acceptance is delayed until the next cell is received. As the cell is temporarily stored in the Reassembly Buffer, there must always be space for that cell. Therefore, the physical size of the Reassembly Buffer must be at least the logical size plus one cell. In the fast SC algorithm the intermediate storage of a cell is not required. The cell is stored immediately in the Reassembly Buffer, when accepted. The delay introduced by the Reassembly Buffer is: starvini x 125s ( starvini + FR x N + P max ) x 125s ----------------------------------------- delay -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N N [12] [11] [9]
[10]
Data Sheet
71
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.4.2.4
Re-Initialization of the Reassembly Buffer
For re-initialization of the Reassembly Buffer by the microprocessor, the processor has to set the "mcp_reinit" bit in the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM2, wait for 1.5 frames and reset "mcp_reinit".
Data Sheet
72
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.5
Internal Clock Recovery Circuit (ICRC)
The Internal Clock Recovery Circuit (ICRC) may generate RTS values in upstream direction and a 8.192, 2.048 or 1.544 MHz transmit clock in downstream direction. Each port works independently using its own set of control registers and error counters. The Cell delay variation is assumed to be less than +/- 4 ms. According to ITU-T 432.1 [33] SRTS clock recovery is only defined for unstructured CES. Therefore, ports supporting SRTS clock recovery have to be configured for only one channel in unstructured CES with completely filled ATM cells. The ICRC supports two Framer Interface formats * FALC Mode (FAM, see Chapter 5.1.1) with a transmit clock frequency of 8.192 MHz for both E1 and T1. * Generic Interface Mode (GIM, see Chapter 5.1.2) with a transmit clock frequency of 2.048 MHz in case of E1 and 1.544 MHz in case of T1. These modes can be selected via bits "om" in the Operation Mode Register (opmo, see Chapter 7.24) and bit "gim" in the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit Configuration Register ("icrcconf", see Chapter 7.46). Transmit clocks are generated by internal PLLs based on SRTS, ACM or both. The method of transmit clock generation is selected via bits "srt" and "acm" in the Configuration Register Downstream of Port N ("condN", see Chapter 7.47). Generation of RTS values is enabled via bit "rtsg" in the Configuration Register Upstream of Port N ("conuN", see Chapter 7.51). If ACM is used, the corresponding RTS generator can be kept disabled. For communication between the ICRC and the rest of the chip a frame based protocol is used. The internal interface as well as its protocol is the same as defined for the external clock recovery interface (see Chapter 5.4). The ICRC contains the following sub blocks:
Data Sheet
73
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
Clock lprd lpru Recovery Interface 0 SDI 10 1
Receive Line Clock
RTS 0 1 lgc 2.43 MHz 32.768 MHz RTS generation ena 0 1 Loopback 1 rtso rtsi 0 1 ena
lpcr 0 1
RTS Transmit FIFO
Frame Generator lptu Frame Receiver 1 1 0
SDOR PDSYN
Transmit Line Clock
1 0 lc8
PLL SRTS PLL FILTER PLL PLL ACM
RTS Receive FIFO
1 0 lgs
RTS Frame Buffer Filling Receiver 2 (ACM) 1 0 lptd SCLK CLK52 RFCLK SDOD
Microprocessor Interface, Test and Control
2.43 MHz Fractional Divider
Figure 19
Block Diagram of the ICRC
4.5.1
Data Flow
In transmit direction the ICRC generates RTS values for each port independently and writes them into the RTS Transmit FIFO. Received RTS values are written to the port specific RTS Receive FIFO to compensate cell delay variation. RTS values for each port are processed at a frequency equal to the SRTS period (8 cells). ACM values are processed immediately by the corresponding PLL.
4.5.2
Frame Generator
This block generates 32-bit control frames that are used for communication with the rest of the system. For synchronization with the system the received synchronization signal PDSYN is used. However, if this signal can't be extracted from the received bit stream by the frame receiver, the frames are generated by means of an internal synchronization counter. The frame output is put in tri-state during power down of the internal interface. As soon as the internal synchronization counter is synchronized on PDSYN signal, the frame output is enabled.
4.5.3
Frame Receiver
This block is implemented twice. Once for SRTS and ACM data via port SDOD and once for the "reset SRTS logic" command via port SDOR.
Data Sheet 74 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description The frame receiver is synchronized to the received synchronization signal PDSYN by means of an internal synchronization counter. In case no sync signal is received, frames are synchronized to the counter. The synchronization between PDSYN and the internal counter is checked each time PDSYN is received. A synchronization error is indicated via bit "scri" in the Interrupt Source Register ("irs", see Chapter 7.44) at the start of a series of wrong synchronized frames. Synchronization errors are counted and the internal synchronization counter is synchronized on the new received synchronization pulse. An errored frame (parity error) is indicated via bit "per" in "irs" but processed as a normal frame. In case the internal interface to the ICRC is switched off by the system, SCLK keeps working. The ICRC detects the following errors: * Parity error: Because SDOD and SDOR are continuously high, the odd parity is violated. * Synchronization error: Because PDSYN is continuously low, synchronization is not possible. For ACM, the Reassembly Buffer filling level is measured in number of octets and passed to the ICRC each time a accepted cell is stored in the Reassembly Buffer. The arrival time between 2 ACM data values is verified. The assumed maximum CDV is 4 ms. The maximum cell distance without CDV is 0.276 ms for T1 and 0.221 ms for E1. In case the next ACM data value is not arrived within 10 ms, an error indicated in register "atlN" is generated.
4.5.4
RTS Receive FIFO
This block is implemented for each port. The RTS Receive FIFO compensates the Cell Delay Variation (CDV), the delay of the system interface with it's FIFO and the phase difference between reading and writing of the RTS Receive FIFO. Each RTS Receive FIFO provides space for 8 RTS values. After reaching the initial filling level of 5 RTS values, delay variations of +3 / -5 RTS values can be compensated. This corresponds to a maximum CDV of -4.4 / +7.3 ms (E1) or 5.8 / +9.7 ms (T1). In case of overflow (register "sroN") or underflow (register "sruN") the PLL-SRTS is put in free running mode and the FIFO is restarted. These events are indicated in the SRTS Receive FIFO Underflow Register (sruN, see Chapter 7.60) and the SRTS Receive FIFO Overflow Register (sroN, see Chapter 7.61). In case of SRTS the PLL start-up is delayed until 5 RTS values are received. This will take 7.3 ms for E1 and 9.7 ms for T1. During this time PLL-SRTS is free running (and bit "frr" of register "statN" is set). If the PLL block does not use RTS values (bit "srt"=0 in register "condN") or the port is in power down mode (bit "pwd"=1 in register "condN") no data is written to this FIFO. In
Data Sheet
75
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description case bit "ena" of register "tsinN" is set, a value from the SRTS Receive FIFO is read by reading register "tsout". In cases where the network clocks of RTS generator and RTS receiver have a frequency offset, the SRTS algorithm will generate a service frequency with the same frequency offset. The rate of RTS value generation and consumption depends on the service clocks. In this special case, the rate of RTS value consumption is different from the rate of RTS value generation. Enabling the ACM algorithm will not help as the FIFO is read by the clock generated by PLL-SRTS. As a result the SRTS Receive FIFO will generate regular (every 20 minutes) under- or overflows.
4.5.5
RTS Transmit FIFO
Each RTS generator stores the RTS value and its port number in the RTS Transmit FIFO. When the frame generator starts generating a new frame, it reads from the FIFO the source address and the next RTS value.
4.5.6
ICRC Loopback Modes
Loopbacks are available for each port and for the system interface of the circuit. Each port has 2 loopbacks. The first, situated near the framer, performs a loopback on the clock signals. It is controlled by the bit "lgc" in the Configuration Register Downstream Direction of Port N (condN, see Chapter 7.47), which sends the generated clock back to the RTS generator, and "lc8" in "condN", which sends the received clock back to the framer interface. The second has the same internal structure. It allows to send received RTS values of all ports back to the RTS Transmit FIFO ("lpcr"=1 in register "condN"). Thus, this loop has a variable delay with a guaranteed maximum of RTS Transmit FIFO depth x Frame-period. If "lgs"=1 in register "condN", generated RTS values are sent via the receive FIFO to the PLL. Another loopback block is situated at the clock recovery interface. It is controlled by the bits "lptd", "lptu", "lprd" and "lpru" in the ICRC configuration register "icrcconf". Not all loop back possibilities of this block carry useful data, but the parity can always be tested.
4.5.7
RTS Injection
In case bit "ena" of the Test Input of Port N register (tsinN, see Chapter 7.50) is set, the RTS Transmit FIFO receives a new RTS value from field "rtsi" of "tsinN" at the moment the microprocessor writes data to that register. RTS values coming from the RTS generator of port N are ignored in this case. RTS values coming from the clock recovery interface and which have to be returned because of loopback "lpcr", have priority over register "tsinN". During this test, the clock recovery or, in case of loopback, the receive FIFO receives the RTS values written in field rtsi. It is advisable to power down the circuit(s) which do not
Data Sheet
76
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description work properly with these RTS values via bit "pwd" of "condN". If "srt" in "condN" is reset, the output of the RTS Receive FIFO is not used by PLL-SRTS.
4.5.8
Fractional Divider
The fractional divider generates a 2.43 MHz clock from the 51.84 MHz clock provided via the CLK52 pin. This is done by selecting 3 out of 64 clock pulses of 51.84 MHz. The resulting 2.43 MHz clock contains jitter components of 810 kHz and above, with a maximum peak to peak jitter of 19 ns.
4.5.9
Clocks
For an overview on the required clocks for the ICRC please refer to Chapter 8.1.
4.5.10
Power Management
Different Power down modes are available for the ICRC: * for each port via bit "pwd" in "condN" * for the Clock Recovery Interface via bit "pdcri" in "icrcconf". * for the complete ICRC by means of the "a_icrc_dwn" bit in the "acfg". This feature reduces the power consumption by approximately 50 mW. Once the ICRC is switched off, it can only be enabled by hardware reset of the whole device.
4.5.11
PLL Block
This block is implemented for each port. It consists of 3 PLLs: PLL-SRTS, PLL-ACM and PLL-FILTER. The bits "srt" and "acm" in the register "condN" define, which PLL is connected to PLLFILTER and used for clock recovery. Each PLL may be used exclusively or in combination.
4.5.11.1 PLL-SRTS:
PLL-SRTS is used for clock recovery using the SRTS method. It has a cut-off frequency of 20 to 50 Hz. The phase detector of PLL-SRTS has a linear range which optimized for jitter tolerance requirements. It is defined by a "window" of accepted RTS values. Each time PLL-SRTS detects values, which fall out of the window, or processes invalid values, it is forced in hold over for 1 SRTS period, bit "hov" of register "statN" is set and the SRTS Invalid Value Processed Counter ("sriN", see Chapter 7.63) is incremented. In case the number of out of window conditions during 16 SRTS periods exceeds the value given by field "tr_srts" of register "treshN", an out of lock message, indicated with bit "ols" of register "oolN" is generated. During start-up of the RTS Receive FIFO, PLL-SRTS is free running and bit "frr" of register "statN" is set.
Data Sheet 77 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.5.11.2 PLL-FILTER
The PLL "PLL-FILTER" has a very low cut off frequency and a tuning range of +/ -240 ppm. It reduces jitter which is generated in, or passed through PLL-SRTS. Although PLLFILTER is placed behind PLL-ACM, it has little or no functionality in case of ACM, as PLL-ACM has a lower cut off frequency. If more out of lock detections during 16 SRTS periods are detected than defined with "tr_filt" in "tresh", an out of lock message, indicated by bit "olf" of register "oolN", is generated.
4.5.11.3 PLL-ACM
The PLL-ACM is a control system with feedback of 2nd order. Its phase is adjusted according to the filling level of the Reassembly Buffer. The average buffer filling level as defined in bits "avb" in the Average Buffer Filling Register ("avbN", see Chapter 7.52) is subtracted from the current buffer filling level. The result is amplified in order to adjust the cut off frequency and to define the system's damping (number of bytes, needed to drive the DCO over its tuning range. The loop gain is programmed in the ACM Shift Factor Register (asfN, see Chapter 7.53). Although adjustable, the PLL-cut-off frequency is generally less than 1 Hz. In conjunction with a low pass filter, CDV is very small. The behaviour of the PLL is characterized by rise time and lock in time. The rise time is the time when the clock output enters the predefined tuning range for the first time. The lock in time is defined as the time after which the clock stays within the accepted deviation.
f/f0
2d 1 0.9 Tr, Tr1: Rise time Tp: Peak time Tl: Lock in time Mp: Peak overshoot 2d: Tuning range Target frequency f 0: 0.1 Tr1 Tr Tp Tl Mp
t
Figure 20
Transient Parameters
Data Sheet
78
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description The tuning range of the DCO is limited to the value programmed to bits "tur" in register "condN". If the phase detector requests a higher frequency deviation the DCO enters out-of-range condition. In this case the DCO's output will be clipped and bit "max" of register "statN" will be set. If the number of out-of-range conditions during 16 ATM cells exceeds the value given by field "tr_acm" of register "treshN", an out-of-lock message, indicated via field "ola" of register "oolN", is generated. Increasing the loop-gain reduces the damping of the PLL-ACM. This will reduce the rise time but results in overshoot and long lock-in times. Reducing the loop-gain increases the damping. This results in lower cut off frequencies, and prevents overshoot. Thus, CDV is less likely to drive the PLL out of lock. The rise and lock-in time are increased. If the loop-gain is too low, the amount of bytes required to drive the DCO over it's tuning range could cause a data buffer over- or underflow. Optimized damping allows minimum lock-in time without overshoot. In this case PLLACM's frequency is moving asymptotically to the correct value.
f/f0
dl
dl: low damping dh: high damping do: optimized damping
do 1
dh
0.1 Tr(dl) Tr(do) = Tl(do) Tr(dh) = Tl(dh)
t
Figure 21
Influence of Damping on Lock in Time
PLL-ACM tries to keep the number of bytes in the Reassembly Buffer at the average buffer filling value programmed to register "avbN". This value should be equivalent to the number of bytes stored in the Reassembly Buffer during start-up, as defined by the value programmed in the "starv_ini" field of the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM3.
Data Sheet
79
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description During start-up and restart, PLL-ACM will be free running for 8 x tiniN[tini] x TData as programmed in the Time of Initial Free Run Register ("tiniN", see Chapter 7.54). During this time the data buffer is filled with an initial number of bytes. As tiniN[tini] is 2 bit longer than "stav_ini" in the AAL Transmit Reference Slot of RAM3 it is possible to choose a longer-than-necessary initialization time, to compensate start-up time differences. After the initial free run, PLL-ACM will start locking in. The lock in time depends on: * The difference between the initial number of bytes in the data buffer (see "starv_ini" of the "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" in RAM3) and the value programmed in register "avbN". * The damping, which is influenced by register "asfN". * The maximum allowed frequency deviation given by "tur" of register "condN". * The required frequency deviation. During this lock-in process, the output frequency might temporarily reach the programmed minimum or maximum value. This strongly depends on the initial difference of the data buffer filling from the value given by "avbN". As re-initialization of the data buffer is not reported to the ICRC, PLL-ACM will detect a huge difference between data buffer filling and the value given by "avbN". As a result the output frequency will be driven to it's lowest allowed value and stays there for a relative long period of time. For this reason it is important to program the field "tur" in register "condN" with the smallest possible value.
4.5.11.4 SRTS with ACM:
The combination of SRTS and ACM is used when the derived network clock of the SRTS generator differs from the derived network clock of the SRTS receiver. The maximum difference is relatively small (+/-4.6 ppm) and should be compensated by ACM. In this case the shifting of the difference between ACM data and register "avbN", as programmed in register "asfN", has to be reduced. Stable operation of PLL-ACM in parallel with PLL-SRTS can not be guaranteed if the shifting is not reduced. The cut off frequency of PLL-ACM has to be much lower than the cut off frequency of PLL-SRTS, as these PLLs are working in parallel in this case. This will also reduce the effects of CDV, because the cut off frequency of PLL-ACM is reduced. The tuning range (register "condN", field "tur") can not be reduced as PLL-ACM has to compensate jitter which is generated by or passed through PLL-SRTS.
Data Sheet
80
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.6 4.6.1
Internal Queues Event Queue
All the functional blocks that process octets or cells can generate counter events, i.e. commands to increment a particular counter in the external RAM. All counter events are written in a FIFO queue that can store 256 counter events. A counter event contains the statistics counter address in external RAM and an increment value.
4.6.2
Output Queue
When a cell is completely stored in the ATM Receive or Segmentation Buffer, it is ready to be transmitted to the ATM layer over the UTOPIA receive interface. The external RAM address of the cell is stored in a common Output Queue (OQ). The Output Queue is a First In First Out (FIFO) queue with a maximum of 256 cell address entries. It is common to ATM and AAL mode ports. As long as the Output Queue is not empty, the Cell Receive processing (CR) will write the corresponding cell from external RAM to the UTOPIA Receive interface (UR).
4.6.3
Interrupt Queue
The Interrupt Queue in external RAM is handled as a FIFO which is written whenever a counter reaches its threshold value. When there are interrupts in the Interrupt Queue, the "iq_ne" bit in the interrupt status register 1 "isr1" will be set to 1. When the corresponding bit is not masked in the "imr1" register an interrupt will be generated on the MPIR1 pin. The microprocessor should react on the interrupt by reading the Interrupt Queue. When "oam_act" is set to 1, the MPADR(12:1) address bits are don't care. The next Interrupt Queue entry will automatically be provided. Each Interrupt Queue entry identifies a particular OAM counter that has reached its threshold value. The counter is identified by its "port_nr", "channel_nr" and "counter_nr". When the microprocessor reads the counter value and the "dest_read" bit of the register oamc is set to 1, the counter is automatically reset. Each Interrupt Queue entry also indicates whether there are still more interrupts in the queue in the "iq_ne" field of the interrupt status register "isr1". This allows the software to read the Interrupt Queue until it is empty without having to read the interrupt status register "isr1" again. When the statistics function is disabled (oamc[oam_act] = 0), the P can read and write all addresses of the Interrupt Queue.
Data Sheet
81
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.7
OAM Processing
The OAM processing block (OM) will read Statistics Counter events from the Event Queue as long as the Event Queue is not empty. The OM will read the Statistics Counter value "count_value" and the Statistics Counter threshold from external RAM. If the Statistics Counter is not yet at its maximum value 4000 0000H, the value is increased with the increment value given by the counter event. If the Statistics Counter threshold is active ("thres_act" = 1) and the Statistics Counter equals or exceeds the threshold value "thres_value", the OM block will write an interrupt entry in the Interrupt Queue in external RAM. The new Statistics Counter value with indication whether an interrupt was generated in the "int_gen" field will finally be written into external RAM. The "dest_read" bit determines whether a read operation from the microprocessor in the Statistics Counter address space in external RAM causes a reset of the Statistics Counter value. The OM block can be disabled via bit "oam_act" in the OAM control register ("oamc", see Chapter 7.3). In normal operation, counter event processing should be activated (oam_act = 1). In this case the microprocessor can only read indirectly in the Interrupt Queue. For RAM test and initialization, the "oam_act" should be set to 0. In this mode, the microprocessor can write and read the complete external RAM. The use of the Statistics Counter thresholds allows the software to reduce the number of generated interrupts and to decide at what error level an interrupt should be generated. When the software wants to use polling mode, the thresholds can be made inactive, and no interrupts will be generated. The software will read all the Statistics Counters on regular time intervals in this mode. A combination of both methods is also possible, all the Statistics Counters are read and reset on regular time intervals. However thresholds can be used as an extra guard: a Statistics Counter that reaches an exceptionally high value will cause an interrupt. For a detailed list of all implemented Statistics Counters refer to Chapter 6.2.1. For information how to translate Statistics Counters into the ATM Forum CES MIB as defined in [10] refer to Chapter 8.2.
Data Sheet
82
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.8 4.8.1
Loopback Modes Upstream Loop
The Upstream Loop block (UL) allows cells that are received at the Framer Interface and forwarded to the UTOPIA Receive Interface to be send back via the UTOPIA Transmit Interface to the Transmitter Interface. The UL block contains a buffer of 4 ATM cells. To activate the Upstream Loop, the "p_ulp" bit in the Port Configuration Register (pcfN, see Chapter 7.1) must be set to 1. When a cell is available in the UL buffer, the UTOPIA transmit interface will de-assert the TXCLAV signal, to prevent the ATM layer component from sending cells during the processing of the loopback cell. For ATM mode ports, all cells are looped regardless of their header. The loop is always transparent allowing looped cells to be visible on the UTOPIA receive interface. For AAL mode ports, it is possible to make a single channel loop using a VCI filter. When the "vci_flt_ulp" bit in the Loopback Control Register (lpbc, see Chapter 7.11) is set to 0 all cells are looped. When the bit is set to 1, only those cells with the 5 LSB bits of the VCI matching the "vci_val_ulp" field of the "lpbc" register will be looped. Loopback can be switched from transparent to non-transparent by setting the "tulp" bit in the "lpbc" register. If the loopback is non-transparent, looped cells are not visible on the UTOPIA receive interface.
4.8.2
Downstream Loop
It is possible to loop ATM cells that are coming in on the UTOPIA transmit interface to the UTOPIA receive interface through the Downstream Loop (DL) block. The DL block contains a buffer of 4 ATM cells. When a cell is available in the DL buffer and in the Output Queue, the UTOPIA receive interface will transmit cells from both buffers with alternating priority. To activate the downstream UTOPIA loop, the "p_dlp" bit in the Port Configuration Register (pcfN, see Chapter 7.1) must be set to 1. When the downstream UTOPIA loopback is active for at least one port, the UTOPIA transmit interface will only assert the RxCLAV signal to 1 when a free space of one ATM cell is available in both the DL buffer and the UT input buffer. The loopback can be made transparent or non-transparent by setting the "tdlp" bit in the Loopback Control Register (lpbc, see Chapter 7.11). If the loopback is made nontransparent, the looped cells are not transferred to the "Cell Transmit Processing" block CT.
Data Sheet
83
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.8.3
Serial Loop
The framer transmit clock, data, framesync and multi-framesync signals can be looped from the Framer Transmit Interface to the Framer Receive Interface per port. This feature can be enabled by setting the "p_slp" bit in the Port Configuration Register (pcfN, see Chapter 7.1). The loopback can be made transparent or non-transparent by setting the "tslp" bit in the Loopback Control Register (lpbc, Chapter 7.11). If the loopback is made transparent, all transmitted data is also visible on FTDAT. Otherwise, if non-transparent, all 1s are transmitted on FTDAT.
Data Sheet
84
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.9
Cell Insertion
This block allows the insertion of predefined cells stored in the Cell Insertion Buffer into the UTOPIA receive cell stream. The Cell Insertion Buffer, located in external RAM, offers space for one ATM cell. The ATM cell except of the UDF octet needs to be written to the Cell Insertion Buffer via the Microprocessor interface. When transferring the cell to the UTOPIA receive interface an UDF of 00H will be inserted. Cell insertion is activated by setting the bit "insert_cell" in the Command Register ("cmd", see Chapter 7.31) the cell is then read from the Cell Insertion Buffer and forwarded to the UTOPIA Receive Interface. The port number is generated randomly. Depending on the UTOPIA mode selection, it will be mapped either on the UTOPIA address bus or in the ATM header ("mapping_mode" = 2, 3, 4 or 5 in register "utconf") overwriting the predefined values.
Data Sheet
85
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.10
Cell Extraction
Cells coming in downstream direction from the UTOPIA Transmit Interface can be extracted to the Cell Extraction Buffer instead of the Reassembly/ATM Transmit Buffer. The Cell Extraction Buffer offers space for 254 ATM cells. It is located in the external RAM. Incoming cells are written to the Extraction Buffer if * their VCI matches to a pattern predefined in the Cell Filter VCI Pattern 1 Register (cfvp1, see Chapter 7.26) where each bit of the VCI can be masked via the Cell Filter VCI Mask Register 1 (cfvm1, Chapter 7.27) * or their VCI matches to a pattern predefined in the Cell Filter VCI Pattern 2 Register (cfvp2, see Chapter 7.28) where each bit of the VCI can be masked via the Cell Filter VCI Mask Register 1 (cfvm1, Chapter 7.29) * or their PTI matches to one of two pattern defined in the Cell Filter Payload Type Register ("cfpt", see Chapter 7.30) each of these patterns can also be masked via "cfpt". Once a cell has been extracted to the cell Extraction Buffer, it is indicated by the bit "cf_fifo_n_empty" in the Extended Interrupt Status Register ("eis1", see Chapter 7.19). Cells can be read with the help of the read pointer ("rdptr") in the Cell Filter Read Pointer Register ("cfrp", Chapter 7.32). The rdptr can have values between 02H and FFH. This value is a pointer to the current base-address, at which the microprocessor can read the next extracted cell from the Extraction Buffer. MPADR = 26000H + 20H * rdptr RMADR = 03000H + 10H * rdptr [13] [14]
After reading the cell the rdptr has to be incremented by the microprocessor and written back. If the rdptr is incremented to its maximum value FFH the value 02H has to be written back instead.
Data Sheet
86
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description
4.11
Mapping of Channels to Timeslots
The two LSB bits of a slot entry identify the slot type: Table 21 Slot Type ATM/AAL Idle ATM/AAL Continuation ATM/AAL Reference Coding of Slot Type in internal configuration RAMs Bit 1 0 1 X Bit 0 0 0 1
4.11.1
ATM Mode
The IWE8 supports any mapping scheme of ATM cells into N of the 32 timeslots of the framer interfaces. The mapping scheme is defined by programming 32 slot positions in the internal RAMs. RAM1 is used for receive port configuration and RAM2 for transmit port configuration. * For each configuration exactly one timeslot should be programmed as the "ATM Reference Slot". * Depending on the Link data rate 29 (E1) or 23 (T1) timeslots should be programmed as "ATM Continuation Slots". * The remaining unused slots should be programmed as "AAL Idle Slots". For mapping of ATM cells in T1/E1 frames according to ITU-T G.804 [26] the internal RAM slot positions should be programmed as shown in Table 22. Table 22 RAM Slot Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RAM slot positions for ITU-T G.804 compliant ATM mapping E1 RAM Slot Type ATM Idle ATM Reference ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation 7 4 5 6 1 2 3 Slot T1 in FAM RAM Slot Type ATM Idle ATM Reference ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Continuation
87
T1 in GIM Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RAM Slot Type ATM Continuation ATM Reference ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation
2002-05-06
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description Table 22 RAM Slot Slot 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 RAM slot positions for ITU-T G.804 compliant ATM mapping E1 RAM Slot Type ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation 22 23 24 19 20 21 16 17 18 13 14 15 10 11 12 Slot 8 9 T1 in FAM RAM Slot Type ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation Slot 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 T1 in GIM RAM Slot Type ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Continuation ATM Idle ATM Idle ATM Idle ATM Idle ATM Idle ATM Idle ATM Idle ATM Idle
However, it is possible to define other ATM cell mappings, e.g. ATM cells in less than 32 64 kbit/s channels. However, RAM slot 1 has always to be defined as Reference Slot.
4.11.2
AAL Mode
4.11.2.1 Unstructured CES
For unstructured CES according to ATM-Forums CES Specification [10] there is only one channel per port. Therefore, the internal configuration RAMs 1 to 3 have only to be
Data Sheet 88 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description programmed with one Reference Slot at RAM slot 0. This slot number is used to identify the channel ("channel_nr" = 0).
4.11.2.2 Structured CES
For AAL ports with structured CES (Nx64 kbit/s) service, the timeslots are grouped into channels containing N of 32 timeslots. The mapping of the N x 64 kbit/s channels into an T1/E1 frame is done by programming the 32 positions of the internal configuration RAMs (RAM1 for receive ports, RAM2 and RAM3 for transmit ports). It is possible to define more than one channel of N timeslots within one frame. In this case each channel has its own reference slot, followed by N-1 continuation slots. Additional unused frame slots that do not belong to any channel should be programmed as "AAL Idle Slot". The timeslot in the group of N timeslots with the lowest frame slot number is called the reference slot. The corresponding frame slot position in the internal RAM should be programmed as an "AAL Reference Slot". The slot number of the AAL Reference Slot is used to identify the channel ("channel_nr"). The other frame slot positions of the channel should be programmed as "AAL Continuation Slots". The reference slot number, as defined by the "ref_slot_nr" field entry, is used to identify the channel the continuation slot belongs to. The N timeslots of a channel do not need to have consecutive frame slot numbers. They can be deliberately chosen out of the 32 frame slots. Table 23 Slot number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Data Sheet
AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES in AAL mode E1 AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle T1 in FAM AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle
89
T1 in GIM AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description Table 23 Slot number 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES in AAL mode E1 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle T1 in FAM AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle T1 in GIM AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle
The channel mapping can be dynamically reconfigured without disturbing other active channels of the same port.
4.11.2.3 Structured CES with CAS
If a port is used for structured CES with CAS, additional signalling is inserted into the channel overhead. The associated RAM slots, 0 in T1 mode and RAM slots 0 and 16 in E1 mode, need to be configured as reference slots with "sdt_mfs" = 1. Please note, that all settings of the AAL Reference Slot refer to the channel payload. Therefore, in case of T1 mode in FAM or E1 mode the channel has to be set to inactive ("channel_mode" = 0) with no bandwidth assigned ("band_width" = 0). In T1 mode in GIM things are different. RAM slot 0 may also be used for user data, with "channel_mode" and "band_width" set according to the requirements of the user data carried via that slot.
Data Sheet 90 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description Table 24 Slot number 0 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES with CAS in AAL mode E1 AAL Reference "channel_mode" = 0 "band_width" = 0 "sdt_mfs" = 1 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle T1 in FAM T1 in GIM AAL Reference AAL Reference "channel_mode" = 0 "sdt_mfs" = 1 "band_width" = 0 "sdt_mfs" = 1 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AAL Reference AAL Idle "channel_mode" = 0 "band_width" = 0 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle
Data Sheet
91
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Operational Description Table 24 Slot number 26 27 28 29 30 31 AAL Idle slot positions for structured CES with CAS in AAL mode E1 AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle T1 in FAM AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle AAL Ref./Cont./Idle T1 in GIM AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle AAL Idle
Data Sheet
92
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5
5.1
Interface Description
Generic Framer Interface
The selection of the Echo Canceller mode is done via an external pin (Pin EC = 0). In standard mode (Pin EC = 1), 4 sub modes can be selected via the "om" bits in the Operation Mode Register ("opmo", see Chapter 7.24) * * * * FALC mode (FAM) Generic Interface mode (GIM) Synchronous mode with an external reference clock of 8 MHz (SYM8) Synchronous mode with an external reference clock of 2 MHz (SYM2)
Depending on the level of the E1/T1 pin FAM and GIM can run based on E1 or T1 frames. SYM2 and SYM8 will always use E1 frame formats. A clock selector for the Framer transmit clock is integrated in the IWE8. Depending on bits "ftckn" in the FT Clock Select Register ("ftcs", see Chapter 7.25) selection between the following clocks is done: * the line clock FRCLK * the SRTS regenerated clock from internal or external clock recovery circuit * the clock derived from the external reference clock (pin RFCLK). The data on the Generic Framer Interface is structured in frames repeated every 125s. Each frame is divided into timeslots, where the least sigificant slot is transmitted first. The data bits in each slot are transmitted starting with the most significant bit.
5.1.1
FALC Mode (FAM)
The IWE8 can be directly connected to Infineon's "Framer and Line interface components" (FALC) as shown in Figure 22.
QuadFALCTM
SCLKR RDO SYPR RMFB FREEZE XMFS SYPX XDI SCLKX
IWE8
FRCLKn FRDATn FRFRSn FRMFBn FRLOSn FTMFSn FTFRSn FTDATn FTCKOn
Figure 22
Data Sheet
Connection of IWE8 to QuadFALC
93 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description The data is transferred between the FALC and the IWE8 via a system internal highway. FRCLK[0:7] FRDAT[0:7] Framer Receive Clock Receive system clock of 8.192 MHz (falling) Framer Receive Data FRDAT is sampled in the middle of the bit period on the falling edge of FRCLK Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Depending on bits "p_ces" in "pcfN": 0= 1= FRFRS[0:7] FRLOS[0:7] FTCKO[0:7] Structured CES: A pulse on this pin designates the first frame of a new multiframe Unstructured CES: Unused
FRMFB[0:7]
FRMFB is always sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK. Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse FRFRS is generated at the beginning of timslot0 of each frame Framer Receive Loss of Signalling Framer Transmit Clock depending on bits ftckn in ftcs: 00 = depending on bit "rts_eval" in "opmo": 0 = Transmit clock input with 8.192 MHz (falling) 1 = Clock of ICRC is used as transmit clock and is also switched to FTCKO pins (FTCKO is output pin) FRCLK Clock derived from RFCLK No clock
01 = 10 = 11 = FTDAT[0:7] FTMFS[0:7]
Framer Transmit Data FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of FTCKO: Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Depending on bit p_ces in pcfN: 0= Structured CES: Depending on "p_tx_mfs" in "pcfN": 0 = Double frame mode: FTMFS is asserted every 2 frames (250 s) 1 = CRC multiframe mode: FTMFS is asserted every 16 frames (2 ms) Unstructured CES: Unused, constant low level
94 2002-05-06
1=
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description FTFRS[0:7] RFCLK Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse FTFRS is generated at the beginning of timslot0 of every frame Reference Clock * Reference clock for the internal clock recovery circuit * Depending on p_rx_em in pcfN: Optional emergency clock if no transition on FRCLK is detected within 23 CLOCK cycles. The segmentation continues using the RFCLK divided by four, and using the byte-pattern programmed to a_emg_bpslct in acfg for the cell payload.
The receive system clock and transmit system clock are both 8.192 MHz, and may be independent from each other. The datarate is 2048 Mbit/s. This means that each bit lasts for 4 clock cycles. Data on the system internal highway is structured in frames of 256 bits every 125 s. It is transmitted in 32 slots numbered from 0 to 31 with slot 0 transmitted first. The data bits of a slot are numbered from 1 to 8. The first transmitted bit `bit 1' is the most significant bit. Figure 23 shows the bit ordering.
Framer Receive Interface: FRCLKn FRDATn FRMFBn FRFRSn
timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1
B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Framer Transmit Interface: FTCKOn FTDATn FTMFSn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FTFRSn
timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1
Figure 23
Framer Interface in FAM
5.1.1.1
T1 Mode
In T1 mode (Pin E1/T1 = 0) there is one F-channel carrying the F-bit (Frame Alignement Signal/Data Link (FS/DL)) and 24 data channels numbered from 0 to 23. When using the
Data Sheet 95 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description QuadFALC in translation mode 0 (See QuadFALC datasheet) these channels are mapped into the 32 frame slots as shown in Table 25
.
Table 25 Frame slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Time slot Mapping in T1 Translation Mode 0 T1 channel F channel (FS/DL) channel 1 channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 channel 5 channel 6 channel 7 channel 8 channel 9 channel 10 channel 11 channel 12 Frame slot 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 channel 22 channel 23 channel 24 channel 19 channel 20 channel 21 channel 16 channel 17 channel 18 channel 13 channel 14 channel 15 T1 channel
The F-channel only contains the F-bit. Its location in the F channel is shown in Table 26. Table 26 MSB bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 F-Channel Format in T1 Mode F channel bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 LSB bit 8 F-bit
5.1.1.2
E1 Mode
In E1 mode (Pin E1/T1 = 1) there are 32 channels numbered from 0 to 31. The channels are directly mapped into the corresponding 32 frame slots.
Data Sheet
96
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.1.2
Generic Interface Mode (GIM)
The Generic Interface Mode (GIM) makes the framer interface more universal, so that other framer/ line interface units or T1/E1 transceivers can be connected directly to the IWE8. Depending on the E1/T1 pin, the interface can be adopted to line bit rates of 1.544 MHz (T1 rate) or 2.048 MHz (E1 rate). The mode is enabled by setting bit om = 01B in "opmo", see Chapter 7.24. Make sure that no clocks are applied to the transmitter when switching to GIM.
5.1.2.1
T1 Mode
Framer Receive Clock Receive clock input at 1.544 MHz Framer Receive Data depending on bit "frri" in "opmo": 0= 1= FRDAT is sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK FRDAT is sampled with the rising edge of FRCLK
FRCLK[0:7] FRDAT[0:7]
FRMFB[0:7]
Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Depending on bits p_ces in pcfN: 0= 1= Structured CES: A pulse on this pin designates the first frame of a new multiframe Unstructured CES: Unused, no constant level allowed FRMFB is active low FRMFB is active high
Depending on bit "rfpp" in "opmo": 0= 1= FRFRS[0:7] FRLOS[0:7] FTCKO[0:7]
FRMFB is always sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK. Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Permanently inactive Framer Receive Loss of Signalling Framer Transmit Clock depending on bits ftckn in ftcs: 00 = depending on bit "rts_eval" in "opmo": 0 = Transmit clock input with 1.544 MHz 1 = Clock of ICRC is used as transmit clock and is also switched to FTCKO pins (FTCKO is output pin) FRCLK
97 2002-05-06
01 =
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description 10 = 11 = FTDAT[0:7] Clock derived from RFCLK No clock
Framer Transmit Data depending on bit "ftri" in "opmo": 0= 1= FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of FTCKO FTDAT is clocked with the rising edge of FTCKO
FTMFS[0:7]
Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Depending on bit p_ces in pcfN: 0= Structured CES: Depending on "p_tx_mfs" in "pcfN": 0 = Superframe frame mode: FTMFS is asserted every 12 frames (1.5 ms) 1 = Extended superframe mode: FTMFS is asserted every 24 frames (3 ms) Unstructured CES: Inactive level FTMFS is active low FTMFS is active high
1= 0= 1= FTFRS[0:7]
Depending on bit "tfpp" in "opmo":
Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse FTFRS is asserted synchronously to the transmission of the F-bit of each frame. Reference Clock * Reference clock for the internal clock recovery circuit * Depending on p_rx_em in pcfN: Optional emergency clock if no transition on FRCLK is detected within 23 CLOCK cycles. The segmentation continues using the RFCLK divided by four, and using the byte-pattern programmed to a_emg_bpslct in acfg for the cell payload.
RFCLK
Data Sheet
98
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
Framer Receive Interface: FRCLKn FRDATn FRMFBn
timeslot 23 timeslot 0 timeslot 1
B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 F B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Framer Transmit Interface: FTCKOn FTDATn FTMFSn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 F B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FTFRSn
timeslot 23 timeslot 0 timeslot 1
Figure 24
Framer Interface in GIM T1
Data Sheet
99
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.1.2.2
E1 Mode
Framer Receive Clock Receive clock input with 2.048 MHz Framer Receive Data depending on bit "frri" in "opmo" 0= 1= FRDAT is sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK FRDAT is sampled with the rising edge of FRCLK
FRCLK[0:7] FRDAT[0:7]
FRMFB[0:7]
Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Depending on bits p_ces in pcfN: 0= 1= Structured CES: A pulse on this pin designates the first frame of a new multiframe Unstructured CES: Unused, no constant level allowed FRMFB is active low FRMFB is active high
depending on bit "rfpp" in "opmo": 0= 1= FRFRS[0:7] FRLOS[0:7] FTCKO[0:7]
FRMFB is always sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK. Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Permanently inactive Framer Receive Loss of Signalling Framer Transmit Clock depending on bits ftckn in ftcs: 00 = depending on bit "rts_eval" in "opmo": 0 = Transmit clock input with 2.048 MHz 1 = Clock of ICRC is used as transmit clock and is also switched to FTCKO pins (FTCKO is output pin) FRCLK Clock derived from RFCLK No clock
01 = 10 = 11 = FTDAT[0:7]
Framer Transmit Data depending on bit "ftri" in "opmo": 0= 1= FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of FTCKO FTDAT is clocked with the rising edge of FTCKO
FTMFS[0:7]
Data Sheet
Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization
100 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description Depending on bit p_ces in pcfN: 0= Structured CES: Depending on "p_tx_mfs" in "pcfN": 0 = Double frame mode: FTMFS is asserted every 2 frames (250 s) 1 = CRC multiframe mode: FTMFS is asserted every 16 frames (2 ms)) Unstructured CES: Inactive level FTMFS is active low FTMFS is active high
1= 0= 1= FTFRS[0:7]
Depending on bit "tfpp" in "opmo":
Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse FTFRS is asserted synchronously to the transmission of the first bit of the first timeslot of each frame. Reference Clock * Reference clock for the internal clock recovery circuit * Depending on p_rx_em in pcfN: Optional emergency clock if no transition on FRCLK is detected within 23 CLOCK cycles. The segmentation continues using the RFCLK divided by four, and using the byte-pattern programmed to a_emg_bpslct in acfg for the cell payload.
RFCLK
Framer Receive Interface: FRCLKn FRDATn FRMFBn
timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1
B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Framer Transmit Interface: FTCKOn FTDATn FTMFSn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FTFRSn
timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1
Figure 25
Data Sheet
Framer Interface in GIM E1
101 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.1.3
Synchronous Modes (SYM)
In these modes, transmit and receive channels are synchronized. Therefore, they may be used for synchronization of frame and multiframe based protocols, e.g. Frame based SDT on E1-Lines. Only one central clock, the external reference clock RFCLK, is used to clock the data on the different ports. Two synchronous modes working at 2.048 MHz and 8.192 MHz for E1lines are available. T1 is not supported. For each of these modes a submode exists, providing global or port specific synchronization. If global synchronization of all transmit and receive channels is desired, bit "symn" in "opmo" has to be deasserted. In this case FRMFB[0] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of all ports. Port specific frame and multiframe synchronization of transmit and receive channels is enabled if bit "symn" in "opmo" is set. In this case frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of each port is based on the corresponding FRMFB. After reset all outputs and inout ports of the framer interface are tristated. They will be enabled by setting bit "p_tx_act" of the corresponding "Port Configuration Register" ("pcfN", see Chapter 7.1).
5.1.3.1
Synchronous Mode at 2.048 MHz (SYM2)
In SYM2 mode the framer interface is clocked with a 2.048 MHz clock connected to RFCLK. The mode is enabled by setting bit om = 11B in "opmo", see Chapter 7.24 All transmit and receive timeslots will be aligned to each other. FRCLK[0:7] FRDAT[0:7] Framer Receive Clock Unused Framer Receive Data depending on bit "frri" in "opmo" 0= 1= FRMFB[0:7] FRDAT is sampled with the falling edge of RFCLK FRDAT is sampled with the rising edge of RFCLK
Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Depending on bits p_ces in pcfN: 0= 1= Structured CES: A pulse on this pin designates the first frame of a new multiframe Unstructured CES: Unused, no constant level allowed
depending on bit "rfpp" in "opmo":
Data Sheet 102 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description 0= 1= 0= FRMFB is active low FRMFB is active high FRMFB[0] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of all ports. FRMFB[1:7] are unused FRMFB[N] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of corresponding ports
depending on bit "symn" in "opmo":
1=
FRMFB is always sampled with the opposite clock-edge of FRDAT. FRFRS[0:7] FRLOS[0:7] FTCKO[0:7] FTDAT[0:7] Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Unused Framer Receive Loss of Signalling Framer Transmit Clock Unused Framer Transmit Data depending on bit "frri" in "opmo": 0= 1= FTMFS[0:7] FTFRS[0:7] RFCLK FTDAT is clocked with the rising edge of RFCLK FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of RFCLK
Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Unused Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse Unused Reference Clock Central framer interface clock with 2.048 MHz
RFCLK FRDATn FRMFB FTDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1
B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FRDATn sampled with rising edge of RFCLK
Figure 26
Framer Interface in SYM2 E1
Data Sheet
103
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.1.3.2
Synchronous Mode at 8.192 MHz (SYM8)
In SYM8 mode the framer interface is clocked with an 8.192 MHz clock connected to RFCLK. The mode is enabled by setting bit om = 10B in "opmo", see Chapter 7.24 All timeslots (transmit and receive) will be aligned to each other. FRCLK[0:7] FRDAT[0:7] Framer Receive Clock Unused Framer Receive Data FRDAT is sampled in the middle of the bit period on the falling edge of RFCLK Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Depending on bits p_ces in pcfN: 0= 1= 0= 1= 0= Structured CES: A pulse on this pin designates the first frame of a new multiframe Unstructured CES: Unused FRMFB is active low FRMFB is active high FRMFB[0] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of all ports. FRMFB[1:7] are unused FRMFB[N] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of corresponding ports
FRMFB[0:7]
depending on bit "rfpp" in "opmo":
depending on bit "symn" in "opmo":
1=
FRMFB is always sampled with the opposite clock-edge of FRDAT. FRFRS[0:7] FRLOS[0:7] FTCKO[0:7] FTDAT[0:7] FTMFS[0:7] Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Unused Framer Receive Loss of Signalling Framer Transmit Clock Unused Framer Transmit Data FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of RFCLK: Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Unused
Data Sheet
104
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description FTFRS[0:7] RFCLK Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse Unused Reference Clock Central framer interface clock with 8.192 MHz
RFCLK FRDATn FRMFB FTDATn B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1
B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Figure 27
Framer Interface in SYM8 E1
5.1.4
Echo Canceller Mode (EC)
In this mode (pin EC = 0) transmit and receive channels are synchronized. The framer interface is clocked with an 8.192 MHz clock connected to RFCLK. All receive channels and the channels transmitted on even ports (near-end signal with echo) are synchronized by means of the FTFRS[0] pin. Shift exists between odd and even FTDAT ports FRCLK[0:7] FRDAT[0:7] Framer Receive Clock Unused Framer Receive Data FRDAT is sampled in the middle of the bit period on the falling edge of RFCLK Framer Receive Multiframe Begin Unused Framer Receive Frame Synchronization Pulse Unused Framer Receive Loss of Signalling Framer Transmit Clock Unused Framer Transmit Data FTDAT is clocked with the falling edge of RFCLK:
FRMFB[0:7] FRFRS[0:7] FRLOS[0:7] FTCKO[0:7] FTDAT[0:7]
Data Sheet
105
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description FTMFS[0:7] FTFRS[0:7] Framer Transmit Multiframe Synchronization Unused Framer Transmit Frame Synchronization Pulse FTFRS[0] is asserted synchronously to the transmission of the first bit of the first timeslot of each frame. FTFRS[1:7] are unused Reference Clock Central framer interface clock with 8.192 MHz
RFCLK
RFCLK FRDATn FTFRS0 FTDATn
even ports
B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 timeslot 31 timeslot 0 timeslot 1
FTDATn
odd ports
B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B1 B2
251 252 253 254 255 256 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 249 250
timeslot 31
timeslot 0
timeslot 1
Figure 28
Framer Interface in EC Mode
Data Sheet
106
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.2
UTOPIA Interface
IWE8
RXADR[0-4] RXDAT[0-7] RXPTY RXSOC RXCLAV RXENB RXCLK TXADR[0-4] TXDAT[0-7] TXPTY TXSOC TXCLAV TXENB TXCLK
UTOPIA Receive Interface (Level 2)
UTOPIA Transmit Interface (Level 2)
Figure 29
UTOPIA Receive and Transmit Interfaces in Slave Mode
The UTOPIA receive and transmit interfaces are implemented according to the ATM forum UTOPIA Level 2 Specification [6] and to the UTOPIA Level 1 Specification [5] . For UTOPIA level 2 compliant mode, the device is compatible to a PHY layer with 8 data lines and 5 address lines. In UTOPIA level 1 compliant mode the interface can be configured to ATM and PHY layer with 8 data lines. In this case the address lines should be left unconnected. According to the UTOPIA standard the ATM-Layer polls the PHY-Ports via the UTOPIA address lines. If the address matches the programmed address range, the PHY controls the flow of data via the TXCLAV or RXCLAV signal. In transmit direction the PHY indicates via assertion of TXCLAV whether the corresponding port is capable of accepting data. In case data can not be transferred to the addressed port due to overrun of the programmed threshold of the port-specific cell buffer, the TXCLAV won't be activated. In receive direction, RXCLAV is activated, if data is available at the addressed port. Depending on the value of the "utmaster" bit in the "UTOPIA Configuration Register" ("utconf", see Chapter 7.34) the IWE8 will either act as an ATM -Layer (master mode) or PHY-Layer (slave mode). As an ATM-Layer, the IWE8 can only work in UTOPIA level 1 compliant mode. As PHY Layer, IWE8 supports both, single PHY in UTOPIA level 1 compliant mode and single/multi PHY in UTOPIA level 2 compliant mode. The selection between UTOPIA level 1 and level 2 can be done via the "utlevel" bit in "utconf".
5.2.1
Port Addresses
The device can implement up to 8 PHY-Ports (= framer ports).
Data Sheet 107 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description In case it is configured for UTOPIA level 2 MPHY mode, the amount of implemented PHY ports can be selected via the associated address range ("utconf[utrange]" with utconf[mapping_mode] = 0). In addition, the transmission of the UTOPIA port number via a user-defined field in the ATM header enables multi PHY operation even in UTOPIA level 1 mode and UTOPIA level 2 single PHY mode as described in Chapter 5.2.3. In UTOPIA level 2 MPHY mode no port number mapping into the ATM header is done. However, using this feature in UTOPIA level 2 mode, will give access to all PHY ports while the UTOPIA interface block is running in single PHY mode. For UTOPIA level 2 compliant multi PHY operation, "mapping_mode" should be reset. In this case the UDF field is set to all zero. In UTOPIA level 2 MPHY mode the port number is transported via the address pins. "utbaseadr" in "utconf" defines the base address under which the ports will be accessible. In UTOPIA level 1 mode, "utbaseadr" has to be set to "0" otherwise cells are discarded. If the device is in single PHY mode, it will react on the address, written into "utbaseadr". In multi PHY mode, the device will be accessible inside a window from "utbaseadr" to "utbaseadr" + "utrange". Where the nth port can be accessed at "utbaseadr" + n.
5.2.2
Back Pressure/ATM Cell Discarding
Backpressure describes the mechanism that controls the TXCLAV signal in UTOPIA PHY mode. IWE8 supports two kinds of backpressure mechanisms, a general and a port specific one. Cells that are destined to inactive ports or channels are generally discarded.
5.2.2.1
General Backpressure Mechanism
The general backpressure mechanism depends only on the filling level of the 4 cell UTOPIA input buffer. General backpressure is active in all UTOPIA configurations: * UTOPIA level 1compliant mode (utlevel=1) * UTOPIA level 2 PHY mode, where the selection between ports is done by ATM header fields (mapping_mode!=0) * UTOPIA level 2 PHY mode, with port selection by ATM header fields disabled (mapping_mode=0) and the port threshold mode ("p_thr_m" bits in "pcfN") disabled. The general threshold is defined in the "Threshold Register" ("thrshld", see Chapter 7.33).
Data Sheet
108
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.2.2.2
Port Specific Backpressure Mechanism
In addition to the general backpressure mechanism, port specific backpressure is available for ATM ports, when using the IWE8 as a UTOPIA level 2 PHY device ("utconf[utlevel]" =0, "utmaster" = 0, "mapping_mode" =0 and "pcfN[p_atm]" =1). It needs to be explicitly enabled with the "p_thr_m" bits in the "Port Configuration Registers" ("pcfN", see Chapter 7.1). Whenever the port transmit buffer filling level falls below the programmed value and the port is selected via the UTOPIA PHY address, the TXCLAV signal is activated, allowing another data transfer for that port. If this transfer exceeds the predefined buffer filling level, the UTOPIA interface immediately enters backpressure state for this port. When using the port specific backpressure mechanism ("p_thr_m" = 01B or 10B) the general threshold defined in the "Threshold Register" ("thrshld", see Chapter 7.33) should be higher than the port specific threshold defined in the "Threshold Port Register" ("thrspN", see Chapter 7.38 to Chapter 7.41).
5.2.3
Sideband Signals of the UTOPIA Interface
In UTOPIA level 1 mode or UTOPIA level 2 single PHY mode, the framer port number ("port_nr[2:0]") can be transmitted via the UTOPIA interface. The field contains the number of the physical (framer) port associated with that ATM cell. Its location inside the ATM header is configurable via the "mapping_mode" bits in "utconf" (Chapter 7.34). Possible locations are: GFC[3:1], VPI[7:5], VCI[15:13], VCI[7:5] or UDF[2:0]. In AAL mode, the channel number ("channel_nr", first timeslot number of a channel, reference timeslot) has to be transmitted on the UTOPIA transmit interface via VCI[4:0]. If no discarding of cells with uncorrectable HEC error is selected on a specific port via bits "a_hec_mode" in the register "acfg" (Chapter 7.2) and "p_cell_disc" in the register "pcfN" (Chapter 7.1) an HEC error flag (HEF) indicates corrupted HEC by setting the most significant bit in the user defined octet at the UTOPIA interface. The bit ENB, bit 5 of the user defined octet, is responsible for the decision if cell discarding shall base on CLP or CLPI.
Data Sheet
109
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
MSB
port_nr[2:0] GFC[3:1] / VPI[11:9] VPI[3:0] VCI[11:8] channel_nr[3:0] VCI[3:0] HEF CLPI ENB UDF[7] UDF[6] UDF[5] UDF[4:3]
GFC[0] / VPI[8]
LSB
port_nr[2:0] VPI[7:5] port_nr[2:0] VCI 15..13 port_nr[2:0] VCI[7:5] PTI VPI[4] VCI[12]
channel_ nr[4]
Header octet 1 Header octet 2 Header octet 3 Header octet 4 User Defined Field
VCI[4] CLP
port_nr[2:0] UDF[2:0]
Figure 30
Utopia Sideband Signals
Data Sheet
110
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.3
IMA Interface
The IWE8 has provisions to support the Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA) protocol implemented in an external component. These are: * An IMA interface * A programmable threshold between read and write pointer of the mapping buffer. If an Uncorrectable HEC Error (UNCHEC) is detected, the cell is discarded and the UNCHEC signal will be asserted. At the same time the port number, where the cell came from, will be available at pins PN[0:2]. The ATM Transmit Buffer Threshold Crossing (ATBTC) signal becomes active when the difference between write and read pointer of the ATM Transmit Buffer becomes smaller than the threshold selected with bits "bufthr" in the "Operation Mode Register" ("opmo", see Chapter 7.24). At the same time the Port Number, where the cell came from, will be available at pins PN[0:2]. At the IMA interface the IWE8 operates in cycles of 12 system clocks. ATBTC can become active during cycle #3, the UNCHEC can become active during cycle #9. The Port number is always active for 6 cycles.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CLOCK ATBTC UNCHEC PN0..2
Figure 31
IMA Interface Protocol
For more detailed information on the IMA interface refer to the Application Hint "Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) with the Interworking Element IWE8".
Data Sheet
111
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.4
Clock Recovery Interface
It is possible to use an external device for clock recovery instead of the ICRC. Therefore an external clock recovery interface is provided. It allows the transmission and reception of serial communication frames containing SRTS values or ACM buffer filling levels to and from an external clock recovery circuit. The usage is controlled by the bits "rtsgen" and "rts_eval" in the Operation Mode Register ("opmo", see Chapter 7.24). The Clock Recovery Interface is a 5 line serial interface: 1 data input SDI, 2 data outputs SDOD and SDOR and 1 synchronization output SSP. The interface allows connection to external clock recovery circuits. Two methods for clock recovery are supported: Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS) and Adaptive Clock Method (ACM). The IWE8 also allows a combination of SRTS and ACM. The data sent over the serial lines is always formatted in frames of 32 bits. The SSP pulse indicates the frame start for both directions. The inter-frame delay should be equivalent to the payload of 8 ATM cells (e.g. for completely filled cells without SDT every 3008 clock periods). Each valid frame is supposed to contain a valid RTS value Table 27 shows the interface frame format. Bit [31] is sent first. When no data is to be sent, idle frames are transmitted consisting of bits [31:1] all 1 and parity bit[ 0] = 0. Table 27 also indicates which data fields are used on the different interface signals. Table 27 Bits 31- 29 28 - 25 24 - 11 10 9-8 7-5 4-2 Clock Recovery Interface frame format Data field 111 RTS[3:0] buffer_fill[13:0] RTS_valid 00 port_nr[2:0] type[2:0] 001: RTS only 010: "buffer_fill" only 011: RTS + "buffer_fill" 111: reset RTS logic others: not used frame_invalid odd_parity SDI Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes SDOD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes SDOR Yes No No No Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes
1 0
Data Sheet
112
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description To allow the external SRTS generation logic to synchronize with the cell segmentation process, the IWE8 will output a frame with type = 111 on the SDOR signal when the segmentation of the first ATM cell for a selected channel starts. The first two sequences of 8 ATM cells will contain a dummy RTS value which is programmable in the "ASIC Configuration Register" ("acfg", see Chapter 7.2). From the third sequence on the values received on the SDI input will be used. The IWE8 has internal `RTS Buffers' for 2 RTS values per port. When one of the `RTS Buffers' overflows, the value in excess will be omitted and a bit in the Extended Interrupt Status Register 2 (eis2, see Chapter 7.20) will be set. When `RTS Buffer' underflow occurs, the last received RTS value will be repeated in the next sequence of 8 ATM cells. The RTS value extracted from a cycle of 8 ATM cells with sequence count 0 to 7, is transmitted on SDOD when the cell with sequence count 1 from the next cycle is received. The `RTS_valid' field is used to indicate whether the extracted RTS value is correct or not. An extracted RTS is accepted as valid if in the previous cycle of 8 cells the cells with SN = 1, 3, 5 and 7 were present and were accepted as valid cells. The buffer filling level is transmitted for use with the Adaptive Clock Method (ACM) and is expressed as a number of octets contained in the `Reassembly Buffer'. The buffer filling level is transmitted every time when a new ATM cell for the selected channel is received.
Data Sheet
113
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.5
Microprocessor Interface
IWE8 contains internal registers, 4 internal RAMs and an external RAM that can be read and written via the Microprocessor Interface. As access to the internal registers is 16-bit oriented, the Microprocessor Address Bus (MPADR) is designed for 16-bit boundaries. Access to the 32-bit-wide internal or external RAM has to be executed in two consecutive 16 bit cycles. The Microprocessor data bus (MPDAT) has "little endian" word order. Little to big endian conversion may be implemented either by initialization of the Microcontroller or by hardwiring MPDAT[0:7] to DATA[8:15] and MPDAT[8:15] to DATA[0:7] respectively, The 32 bit oriented accesses have to be done by two consecutive 16 bit accesses, the first with MPADR[0] = 0 and the second with MPADR[0] = 1. The IWE8 will not verify whether the address bits MPADR[17:1] during the second access are the same as during the first access. The data of the first of two consecutive write cycles (MPADR[0] = 0) is written temporarily into an internal write-cache register. The second write cycle (MPADR[0] = 1) causes the data to be written into internal or external RAM. Bits [15:0] are written from the internal write-cache register and bits [31:16] are transferred from MPDAT During the first of two consecutive read cycles (MPADR[0] = 0), the 32 bit data are actually read from internal or external RAM. Bits [15:0] are transferred to the databus MPDAT. Bits [31:16] are written into an internal read-cache register. During the second read (MPADR[0] = 1) the read-cache register is transferred to the databus. When only bits [15:0] are needed, the second read cycle can be omitted. For proper operation without acknowledge handshake via MPRDY 23 waitstates can be used.
5.5.1
Interrupt Handling
The IWE8 provides two independent interrupt pins MPIR1 and MPIR2. The interrupt handling software should read the interrupt status registers to identify the causes of the interrupt. MPIR1 is the main interrupt pin indicating a special event in the IWE8. The interrupt cause can be determinded by reading Interrupt Status Register 1 ("isr1", see Chapter 7.18). Each of the interrupt sources can be individually masked in the corresponding interrupt mask register. If the interrupt source is masked, the interrupt pin MPIR1 will not be asserted when the corresponding event occurs. MPIR2 is an auxiliary interrupt pin. The IWE8 provides two sets of 8 independent timers in external RAM (timer set 1 and 2). Timer set 2 can be used independently from the rest of the IWE8 driver software. When one of the timers of timer set 2 expires, a bit will be set in the Interrupt Status Register 2 ("isr2", see Chapter 7.23) and MPIR2 will be asserted.
Data Sheet
114
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.5.2
Microprocessor Interface Mode
The IWE8 microprocessor interface allows connection of Intel type microprocessors as well as Motorola type microprocessors (e.g. the PowerPC). The Microprocessor Interface Mode is determined via the status of the pins PMT and TBUS at the positive edge of the internal reset. Therefore, PMT and TBUS levels have to be kept at least 3 clock cycles after deassertion of RESET. Table 28 PMT 0 1 Configuration of the Microprocessor Interface Mode via PMT and TBUS TBUS 0 1 Mode Intel Mode Motorola Mode
The mode currently assigned to the microprocessor interface is visible via "mtypsel" in the "Version Register" ("vers", see Chapter 7.16). Intel Mode The connection of the 16 bit Intel compatible asynchronous microprocessor interface to an Intel 386EX processor is shown in Figure 32. If the ready signal at pin MPRDY shall be used, a glue logic between MPRDY of the IWE8 and RDY of the 386EX is required, which generates an active low signal with 1 microprocessor cycle length after a rising edge detection of the MPRDY signal.
Intel i386 EX
INTi INTj CSn RD WR DATA[0-15] ADR[1-18]
IWE8
MPIR2 MPIR1 MPCS MPRD MPWR MPDAT[0-15] MPADR[0-17]
Figure 32
Connection of IWE8 to an Intel Type Microprocessor
Motorola Mode Figure 33 shows the connection of the 16 bit Motorola compatible asynchronous interface to the IBM "PowerPCTM".
Data Sheet
115
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
MC 68xxx
INTi INTj TA CSn TS RD/WR DATA[0-15] A[1-18]
IWE8
MPIR2 MPIR1 MPTA MPCS MPTS MPRW MPDAT[0-15] MPADR[0-17]
Figure 33
Connection of IWE8 to an Motorola Type Microprocessor
Data Sheet
116
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.6
External RAM Interface
The IWE8 needs to be connected to an external synchronous SRAM of 64k x 33 bits with parity protection or 64k x 32 bits without parity protection. For proper operation FT (Flow Through) SSRAM is needed. Pipelined SSRAM can not be used, as this type has additional registered outputs. A possible connection with 1 SRAM 64k x 36 component is shown in Figure 34.
.
IWE8
RMCLK RMADR[0-15] RMCS RMWR RMOE RMADC RMDAT[0-32]
SRAM 64K x 36
CLK A[0-15] CS WR OE ADSC D[0-35]
Figure 34
External RAM Connection
The IWE8 has a fixed RAM interface cycle of 12 clock periods. A sequence of 6 consecutive read cycles (addresses AR1 to AR6), a dummy address cycle and 5 consecutive write cycles (addresses AW1 to AW5) is continuously repeated. The timing of RMADC and RMOE is always fixed as shown in Figure 35. Whether the IWE8 reads data from the external RAM or writes data into the external RAM is controlled by the RMCS and RMWR signals. In Figure 35, data R1 and R3 are actually read by the IWE8, and data W1 and W3 are actually written into the external RAM.
RMCLK
RMADR
W5
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5
R1
RMADC
RMOE
RMDAT
W5
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5
RMWR
RMCS RAM cycle
Figure 35
Data Sheet
RAM Interface Protocol
117 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.7
Boundary Scan Interface
The boundary scan interface implements the Test Access Port (TAP) as defined in IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 [19] including the optional TRST reset signal. The device identification register, the instruction register and boundary-scan register are described in the electrical characteristics.
Data Sheet
118
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Interface Description
5.8
Master Clock
The basic processing time of an octet in the IWE8 is 12 clock cycles. As the time needed to process one octet for each of the 8 ports must be less than the time required to transfer one octet over a framer interface, this leads to the condition: m x o x T CLOCK < f x b x T FramerClk with: m = 12 master-clockcycles needed for one octet per port o = 8 ports f = Framer-clockcycles per bit b = 8 bits per octet T Clock f > ----- x T FramerClk 12 Master Clock Frequency Depending on Mode TCLOCK < 1/3 x TFramerCLK FCLOCK > 3 x FFramerCLK = 3 x 8.192 MHz [16] [15]
Table 29 Mode
FAM, SYM8 and EC GIM E1 and SYM2 GIM T1
< 1/12 x TFramerCLK > 12 x FFramerCLK = 12 x 2.048 MHz < 1/12 x TFramerCLK > 12 x FFramerCLK = 12 x 1.544 MHz
Data Sheet
119
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
6
Memory Structure
The IWE8 occupies an address space of 256k x 16 bits. The lower 128k x 16 bits are used for internal registers and internal configuration RAM's. The upper 128k x 16 bits are used to address external RAM. MPADR[17:0] 3FFFFH 128k x 16 64k x 32 External RAM 20000H 1FFFFH Not used 00A00H 009FFH 00800H 007FFH 00600H 005FFH 00400H 003FFH 00200H 001FFH 00000H Figure 36 Memory Model 512 x 16 Internal Registers 512 x 16 256 x 32 Internal RAM1 512 x 16 256 x 32 Internal RAM2 512 x 16 256 x 32 Internal RAM3 512 x 16 256 x 32 Internal RAM4 0000H RMADR[15:0] FFFFH
The 4 internal configuration RAMs are organized as 256 x 32 bit memories. The external RAM is organized as a 64k x 32 bit parity protected memory. Accesses to internal configuration RAM's or external RAM are always 32 bit oriented.
Data Sheet 120 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
6.1
Internal Configuration RAM's
The 4 internal 256 x 32 bit configuration RAM's (RAM1, RAM2, RAM3 and RAM4) are used to assign the timeslots of the Framer Receive and Framer Transmit interfaces to ATM channels. For each port there are 32 entries. RAM1 is used to define the timeslots of the Framer Receive ports, and RAM2 and RAM3 are used to define the Framer Transmit ports. RAM4 is responsible for CAS conditioning and freezing in transmit direction When the contents of the internal RAMs have been altered by the software, the internal state machines will load the new values within the next 1.5 frame cycles (187.5 s). Up to that point of time the previous values are used.
6.1.1
RAM1: Receive Port Configuration
Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size 256K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 slots x 1 doubleword MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
port_nr [2:0]
slot[4:0]
6.1.1.1
RAM1: ATM Receive Reference Slot
Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 Not used 23 Not used 15 Not used 7 ocd_start ocd_end _intrpt _intrpt go_hunt delete_ x43_ idle_cells descram bling channel_mode[1:0] 0 ref_slot =1 8 16 24
Data Sheet
121
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
ocd_start_ intrpt
Generate interrupt when OCD state starts 0= 1= Disabled Enabled
ocd_end_ intrpt
Generate interrupt when OCD state ends 0= 1= Disabled Enabled Cell delineation finite state machine normal operation Cell delineation finite state machine forced in hunt state Only the transition 0 1 forces the hunt state. Counter (number of times SYNC state is left) is not incremented. Ocd_start interrupt is not generated.
go_hunt
Go to hunt state 0= 1=
delete_idle_ Delete idle/unassigned cells enable cells 0= 1= x43_de scrambling Disabled Enabled
ATM cell payload descrambling enable 0= 1= Disabled Enabled
channel_ mode
Channel mode 00 = 01 = 10 = 11 = Inactive mode Active mode (normal mode) Standby mode Active mode (normal mode) This slot is a reference slot
ref_slot
Reference slot indicator 1=
Note: To allow IWE8 internal initialization, all channels must remain in inactive mode for at least 250 s after activation of the port (i.e. setting pcfN[p_rx_act] = 1). During this time the device connected to the Framer Receive Interface has to be in normal operation.
Data Sheet 122 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
6.1.1.2
RAM1: ATM Receive Continuation Slot
Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 Not used 23 Not used 15 Not used 7 Not used ref_slot_nr[4:0] cont_slot =1 0 ref_slot =0 8 16 24
ref_slot_nr cont_slot ref_slot
Reference slot number Number of the reference slot of this channel Continuation slot indicator 1= 0= This slot is a continuation slot This slot is not a reference slot Reference slot indicator
6.1.1.3
RAM1: AAL Receive Reference Slot
Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW
.
31 next_slot_nr[4:0] 23 subst_bpslct[1:0] 15 aal0 7 part_fill[5:0] dcor dcor_random_nr[4:0] sdt_mfs sig_cond
24 srts 16 8 band_ width[4] 0
Data Sheet
123
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure band_width[3:0] sdt channel_mode[1:0] ref_slot =1
next_slot_nr Next slot number If band_width > 0 next_slot_nr points to the next slot of this channel. If band_width = 0 and CAS is activated next_slot_nr[3:0] will be used as signalling conditioning nibbles. If band_width = 0 and CAS is not activated next_slot_nr is don't care. sdt_mfs SDT multiframe pulse select X= 0= 1= sig_cond If [aal0] = 1 or [sdt] = 0 or pcfN[p_ces] = 1 Start of structure is frame pulse Start of structure is multiframe pulse as defined by pcfN[p_tx_mfs] CAS freezing upstream enabled in "loss of signal" condition CAS conditioning upstream enabled in "loss of signal" condition
Signalling conditioning upstream 0= 1=
srts
SRTS enable Enables RTS value insertion into AAL1 SAR-PDUs X= 0= 1= If pcfN[p_srts] = 0 or [aal0] = 1 Disabled Enabled
subst_ bpslct
Substitute byte-pattern select 00 = 01 = 10 = 11 = Select byte-pattern 0, defined in bp10[bp0] Select byte-pattern 1, defined in bp10[bp1] Select byte-pattern 2, defined in bp32[bp2] Select byte-pattern 3, defined in bp32[bp3] Disabled Enabled
dcor
Decorrelation circuit enable 0= 1=
dcor_ random_nr aal0
Data Sheet
Decorrelation random Number X= if [dcor] = 0
AAL0 enable
124 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure 0= 1= part_fill 4 to 48 4 to 47 4 to 47 Disabled (AAL1 is used) Enabled (instead of AAL1) AAL0: [aal0] = 1 AAL1 unstructured CES: [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 1 AAL1 structured CES without CAS1): [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 0, pcfN[p_cas] = 0
Partially filled cell filling level
4+Cb AAL1 structured CES with CAS2): to 46 [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 0, pcfN[p_cas] = 1 band_width band_width N-1 1FH sdt X= 0= 1= channel_ mode Structured CES (with N = number of timeslots of the channel) Unstructured CES (pcfN[p_ces] = 1) If pcfN[p_ces] = 1 or [aal0] = 1 Disabled Enabled
SDT enable
Channel mode 00 = 01 = 10 = 11 = Inactive mode Active mode (normal mode) Standby mode Substitute mode This slot is a reference slot
ref_slot
1) 2)
Reference slot indicator 1=
non-P format, cell may have only 46 user data octets in P format Cb: Required bytes for the CAS sub-block in an ATM cell
Note: To allow IWE8 internal initialization, all channels must remain in inactive mode for at least 250 s after activation of the port (i.e. setting pcfN[p_rx_act] = 1). During this time the device connected to the Framer Receive Interface has to be in normal operation.
Data Sheet
125
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
6.1.1.4
RAM1: AAL Receive Continuation Slot
Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 next_slot_nr[4:0] 23 Not used 15 fourth_slot_nr[3:0] 7 third_slot _nr[0] ref_slot_nr[4:0] cont_slot =1 third_slot_nr[4:1] 0 ref_slot =0 sig_cond_nibble[3:0] Not used 16 fourth_ slot_nr[4] 8 24
next_slot_nr Next slot number Number of the next slot of this channel. When no continuation slots exist, the entry "next_slot_nr" should refer to the reference slot. sig_cond_ nibble 4 bits for signalling conditioning It is possible to have different signalling conditioning nibbles for all slots of a channel except for the first two slots of a channel. The first slot in a channel will always use the same nibbles as the first continuation slot.
fourth_slot_ Fourth slot number nr Number of the fourth slot of this channel X= third_slot_ nr ref_slot_nr cont_slot ref_slot If [band_width] < 3 Third slot number Number of the third slot of this channel X= If [band_width] < 2 Reference slot number Number of the reference slot of this channel Continuation slot indicator 1= 0= This slot is a continuation slot This slot is not a reference slot Reference slot indicator
Data Sheet
126
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
6.1.1.5
RAM1: ATM or AAL Receive Idle Slot
Read/write Address 00200H to 003FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 Not used 23 Not used 15 Not used 7 Not used cont_slot =0 0 ref_slot =0 8 16 24
cont_slot ref_slot
Continuation slot indicator 0= 0= This slot is not a continuation slot This slot is not a reference slot Reference slot indicator
6.1.2
RAM2: Transmit Port Configuration
Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size 256K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 slots x 1 doubleword MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 9 0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
port_nr [2:0]
slot[4:0]
6.1.2.1
RAM2: ATM Transmit Reference Slot
Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW.
Data Sheet
127
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
31 Not used 23 Not used 15 Not used 7 Not used x43_ scrambling channel_mode[1:0]
24 16 8 0 ref_slot =1
x43_scram bling
ATM cell payload scrambling enable 0= 1= Disabled Enabled
channel_ mode
Channel mode 00 = 01 = 10 = 11 = Inactive mode Active mode (normal mode) Standby mode Active mode (normal mode) This slot is a reference slot
ref_slot
Reference slot indicator 1=
Note: RAM slot 1 has always to be configured always as reference slot. Note: To allow IWE8 internal initialization, all channels must remain in inactive mode for at least 250 s after activation of the port (i.e. setting pcfN[p_tx_act] = 1). During this time the device connected to the Framer Transmit Interface has to be in normal operation.
6.1.2.2
RAM2: ATM Transmit Continuation Slot
Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW.
Data Sheet
128
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
31 next_slot_nr[4:0] = 00000 23 Not used 15 Not used 7 Not used ref_slot_nr[4:0] cont_slot =1 Not used
24 16 8 0 ref_slot =0
next_slot_nr Next slot number 0= ref_slot_nr cont_slot ref_slot This field must be all 0 for ATM continuation slots Reference slot number Number of the reference slot of this channel Continuation slot indicator 1= 0= This slot is a continuation slot This slot is not a reference slot Reference slot indicator
6.1.2.3
RAM2: AAL Transmit Reference Slot
Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 next_slot_nr[4:0] 23 sc_fast 15 aal0 7
Data Sheet 129
24 Not used snp_ check crv_en sn_ check 16 sdt_mfs sdt_oos_nr[1:0] sdt_par sdt_once mcp_ reinit 8 part_fill[5:0] band_ width[4] 0
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure band_width[3:0] sdt channel_mode[1:0] ref_slot =1
next_slot_nr Next slot number Number of the second slot of this channel. When no continuation slots exist, the entry "next_slot_nr" should refer to the reference slot. X= snp_check X= 0= 1= sn_check X= 0= 1= sc_fast X= 0= 1= sdt_mfs X= 0= 1= sdt_oos_nr X= 00 = 01 = 10 = 11 = sdt_par X= 0= If pcfN[p_ces] = 1 If [aal0] = 1 or [sn_check] = 0 Disabled Enabled If [aal0] = 1 Disabled Enabled If [aal0] = 1 or [sn_check] = 0 Standard SC algorithm Fast SC algorithm If [aal0] = 1 or [sdt] = 0 or pcfN[p_ces] = 1 Start of structure is frame pulse Start of structure is multiframe pulse If [aal0] = 1 or [sdt] = 0 Re-initialize after 1 out of sync error (recommended) Re-initialize after 2 out of sync error Re-initialize after 3 out of sync error Not allowed, IWE8 will not be able to re-initialize If [aal0] = 1 or [sdt] = 0 Disabled SNP field check enable
SN field check enable
SC algorithm select
SDT multiframe pulse select
Number of SDT out of sync errors before re-initialization buffer
SDT pointer parity check enable
Data Sheet
130
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure 1= sdt_once X= 0= 1= Enabled If [aal0] = 1 or [sdt] = 0 All cells with CSI bit = 1 and even SN are supposed to contain a P format SAR-SDU. Only the first cell with CSI bit = 1 and even SN in a cycle of 8 cells is supposed to contain a P format SAR-SDU. (recommended for SDT)
SDT pointer appears once in 8 cell cycle
crv_en
Data to Clock Recovery interface enable (RTS values and/or ACM buffer filling levels) This bit may only be set for one channel per port. X= 0= 1= if (pcfN[p_srts] = 0 and pcfN[p_acm] = 0) or acfg[a_crv_en] = 0 Disabled Enabled
Only one channel per port may have crv_en set to 1. mcp_reinit Microprocessor forced reassembly buffer reinitialization The SW should set and reset this bit to continue proper operation. 0= 1= aal0 0= 1= part_fill 4 to 48 4 to 47 4 to 47 Disabled Enabled Disabled (AAL1 is used) Enabled (instead of AAL1) AAL0: [aal0] = 1 AAL1 unstructured CES: [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 1 AAL1 structured CES without CAS1): [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 0, pcfN[p_cas] = 0
AAL0 enable
Partially filled cell filling level
4+Cb AAL1 structured CES with CAS2): to 47 [aal0] = 0, pcfN[p_ces] = 0, pcfN[p_cas] = 1 band_width band_width N X= sdt (with N = number of timeslots for this channel) if pcfN[p_ces] = 1
Structured Data Transfer enable
Data Sheet
131
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure X= 0= 1= channel_ mode If pcfN[p_ces] = 1 or [aal0] = 1 Disabled Enabled
Channel mode 00 = 01 = 10 = 11 = Inactive mode Active mode (normal mode) Standby mode Active mode (normal mode) This slot is a reference slot
ref_slot
1) 2)
Reference slot indicator 1=
non-P format, cell may have only 46 user data octets in P format Cb: Required bytes for the CAS sub-block in an ATM cell
Note: To allow IWE8 internal initialization, all channels must remain in inactive mode for at least 250 s after activation of the port (i.e. setting pcfN[p_rx_act] = 1). During this time the device connected to the Framer Transmit Interface has to be in normal operation.
6.1.2.4
RAM2: AAL Transmit Continuation Slot
Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 next_slot_nr[4:0] 23 Not used 15 Not used 7 Not used ref_slot_nr[4:0] cont_slot =1 slot_index[4:0] 0 ref_slot =0 8 Not used 16 24
Data Sheet
132
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
next_slot_nr Next slot number Number of the next slot of this channel. When no continuation slots exist, the entry "next_slot_nr" should refer to the reference slot. slot_index Index number of the current slot X= 2= 3= ... 30 = ref_slot_nr cont_slot ref_slot if pcfN[p_cas] = 0 1st continuation slot 2nd continuation slot ... 29th continuation slot
Reference slot number Number of the reference slot of this channel Continuation slot indicator 1= 0= This is a continuation slot This slot is not a reference slot Reference slot indicator
6.1.2.5
RAM2: ATM or AAL Transmit Idle Slot
Read/write Address 00400H to 005FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 Not used 23 Not used 15 Not used 7 idle_ bpslct[0] Not used cont_slot =0 8 idle_ bpslct[1] 0 ref_slot =0 16 24
idle_bpslct
Idle slot byte-pattern select 00 = Select byte-pattern 0, defined in bp10[bp0]
Data Sheet
133
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure 01 = 10 = 11 = cont_slot ref_slot 0= 0= Select byte-pattern 1, defined in bp10[bp1] Select byte-pattern 2, defined in bp32[bp2] Select byte-pattern 3, defined in bp32[bp3] This is not a continuation slot This slot is not a reference slot
Continuation slot indicator Reference slot indicator
6.1.3
RAM3: Transmit Port Configuration Extended
Read/write Address 00600H to 007FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size 256K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 slots x 1 doubleword MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 9 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
port_nr [2:0]
slot[4:0]
RAM3 needs only to be programmed in the case of an "AAL Transmit Reference Slot'. In all other cases the RAM3 entry is don't care.
6.1.3.1
RAM3: AAL Transmit Reference Slot
Read/write Address 00600H to 007FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 Not used 23 starv_ini[7:0] 15 buff_lsize[13:6] 7 buff_lsize[5:0] auto_ reinit_of 0 auto_ reinit_uf 8 starv_bpslct[1:0] starv_ini[10:8] 16 24
Data Sheet
134
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
starv_bpslct Starvation byte-pattern select 00 = 01 = 10 = 11 = starv_ini Select byte-pattern 0, defined in bp10[bp0] Select byte-pattern 1, defined in bp10[bp1] Select byte-pattern 2, defined in bp32[bp2] Select byte-pattern 3, defined in bp32[bp3]
Number of starvation octets sent at reassembly buffer initialization. 0.. The actual number of starvation octets sent is starv_ini + 1 2046 2047 An unlimited number of starvation octets will be sent
buff_lsize
Logical size of reassembly buffer in octets
auto_reinit_ Automatic reassembly buffer reinitialization at overflow of X= 0= 1= If [aal0] =1
P controlled reassembly buffer initialization
automatic reassembly buffer initialization
auto_reinit_ Automatic reassembly buffer reinitialization at underflow uf X= 0= 1= If [aal0] = 1
P controlled reassembly buffer initialization
automatic reassembly buffer initialization
6.1.4
RAM4: Transmit Port Configuration Extended
Read/write Address 00800H to 009FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size 256K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 slots x 1 doubleword MPADR 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 9 0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
port_nr [2:0]
slot[4:0]
RAM4 needs only to be programmed in the case of an "AAL Transmit Reference Slot" and in case of CAS usage. In all other cases the RAM4 entry is don't care.
Data Sheet
135
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
6.1.4.1
RAM4: AAL Transmit Conditioning Slot
Read/write Address 00800H to 009FFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW. 31 Not used 23 Not used 15 Not used 7 Not used cond_en cond_down_nibble[3:0] 0 8 16 24
cond_down _nibble cond_en
CAS conditioning nibbles in downstream for the slot Conditioning enable 0= 1= CAS downstream freezing enabled in underrun or pointer mismatch condition CAS downstream conditioning enabled in underrun or pointer mismatch condition
Data Sheet
136
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
6.2
External RAM
The IWE8 requires an external 64K x 32 bit RAM. A 33th bit is added for parity. MPADR[17:0] 3FFFFH 30000H 2FFFFH 28000H 27FFFH 26040H 2603FH 26020H 2601FH 26000H 25FFFH 24000H 23FFFH 22000H 21FFFH 20000H Figure 37 8k x 16 8k x 16 8k x 16 32 x 16 32 x 16 64k x 16 32k x 16 8128 x 16 32k x 32 16k x 32 4064 x 32 Cell Extraction Buffer 16 x 32 Cell Insertion Buffer 16 x 32 Timers 4k x 32 Interrupt queue 4k x 32 Statistics Counter thresholds 4k x 32 Statistics Counters Structure of the IWE8 external RAM Reassembly / ATM Transmit Buffers Segmentation / ATM Receive Buffers RMADR[15:0] FFFFH 8000H 7FFFH 4000H 3FFFH 3020H 301FH 3010H 300FH 3000H 2FFFH 2000H 1FFFH 1000H 0FFFH 0000H
6.2.1
Statistics Counters
Read/write Address 20000H to 21FFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 4K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 channels x 16 counters. The statistics counters are incremented when the "channel_mode" is active or standby, and when the corresponding enable bit in the "catm" or "caal" register is set. RMADR MPADR 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 9 8 9 7 8 6 7 5 6 4 5 3 4 2 3 1 2 0 1 0 0
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 port_nr [2:0]
channel_nr[4:0]
counter_nr[3:0]
Data Sheet
137
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure Table 30 counter_nr 0 2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1) 2)
Statistics Counters for ATM Ports 1) Counter contents Number of discarded cells due to output queue, ATM Receive Buffer overflow Number of received cells with correctable HEC errors Number of received cells with non-correctable HEC errors Number of times cell delineation SYNC state is left, except when forced by the processor Number of discarded cells due to ATM transmit buffer overflow Number of cells which have been discarded because of CLP or CLPI Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
For ATM ports, the counters are located in channel_nr = 00000B Counter_nr 0 is common to all ports and is located in port_nr = 111B channel_nr = 11111B
Table 31 Counter_nr 0 1 2
2)
Statistics Counters for AAL Ports1) Counter contents Number of discarded cells due to Output Queue or Segmentation Buffer overflow Not used Number of cells written to the Reassembly Buffer. It excludes cells that were discarded for any reason and cells that are inserted instead of lost cells (atmfReassembledCells) Number of times incoming MFB pulse is not synchronous to SDT start of structure upstream (AAL1)
138 2002-05-06
3
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure Table 31 4 Statistics Counters for AAL Ports1) (cont'd) Number of cells causing a Reassembly Buffer overflow (AAL0 & AAL1). It includes accepted cells that are causing the filling level to exceed the predifined threshold and discarded cells due to the attempt of writing to the Reassembly Buffer when the threshold is already exceeded. Number of end of Reassembly Buffer overflow (AAL0 & AAL1). The value is incremented upon acceptance of the next cell after Reassembly Buffer overflow. The count of the number of AAL1 header errors detected including those corrected. Header errors include correctable and uncorrectable CRC, plus bad parity. (atmfCESHdrErrors) Number of times that the sequence number of an incoming AAL1 SARPDU causes a transition of the SC algorithm from "sync" to "out of sequence" and from "invalid" to "out of sync" Number of downstream "misinserted cells" detected by the AAL1 sequence count algorithm (atmfCESMisinsertedCells) Number of downstream cells discarded by the AAL1 sequence count algorithm Number of rejected AAL1 SDT pointers due to parity error or wrong pointer value (93 < pointer <127) Number of SC cycles with more than one AAL1 SDT pointer field if only one pointer is expected (sdt_once = 1) Number of start of reassembly buffer underflow (AAL0 & AAL1) (atmfCESBufUnderflow) Number of inserted starvation cells (AAL0 & AAL1) due to reassembly buffer underflow Number of times the Reassembly Buffer is re-initialized due to AAL1 start of structure is out of sync with port start of structure (see Chapter 4.4.1.11) This records the count of the number of events in which the AAL1 reassembler found that an SDT pointer is not where it is expected, and the pointer must be reacquired. This count is only meaningful for structured CES. (atmfCESPointerReframes) Number of downstream "lost cells" detected by the AAL1 sequence count algorithm (atmfCESLostCells)
5
6
7
8 9 10 11 12 13 3) 14
15
1) 2)
For AAL ports with unstructured CES, the counters are located in channel_nr = 00000B Counter_nr 0 is common for all ports and is located in port_nr = 111B channel_nr = 11111B
Data Sheet
139
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
3)
If the "auto-re-initialization on underflow" feature is enabled (RAM3.AAL Transmit Reference Slot.auto_reinit_uf = 1B), the re-initialization of the Reassembly Buffer will terminate an underflow status as soon as start of underflow is detected. Thus, the underflow status for the device is no longer valid although the underflow condition still exists. No starvation cells due to underflow will be inserted and counter 13 will not increment Therefore, it is recommended to disable "auto-re-initialization on underflow" (RAM3.AAL Transmit Reference Slot.auto_reinit_uf = 0B) and perform the re-initialization of the reassembly buffer by software.
The format of the counter entries is as follows: 31 int_gen 23 count_value[23:16] 15 count_value[15:8] 7 count_value[7:0] 0 8 count_value[30:24] 16 24
int_gen
interrupt queue entry generated Indicates if an interrupt queue entry was generated for this counter. Only one interrupt queue entry per counter can be generated. 0= 1= False True
count_value counter value 4000_0000H indicates the maximum value. The counter will not increment beyond this value
6.2.2
Statistics Counter thresholds
Read/write Address 22000H to 23FFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 4K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 channels x 16 counter thresholds
Data Sheet
140
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
RMADR MPADR 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 1
9
8 9
7 8
6 7
5 6
4 5
3 4
2 3
1 2
0 1 0 0
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 port_nr [2:0]
channel_nr [4:0]
counter_nr [3:0]
The format of the counter threshold entries is as follows: 31 thres_act 23 thres_value[23:16] 15 thres_value[15:8] 7 thres_value[7:0] 0 8 thres_value[30:24] 16 24
thres_act
threshold active 0= 1= Disabled Enabled
thres_value
threshold value Thresholds beyond 4000 0000H will never create an interrupt queue entry as the counter stops at this value
6.2.3
Interrupt Queue
Read/write Address 24000H to 25FFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 4K x 32 bits RMADR MPADR 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 1 0 9 8 9 7 8 6 7 5 6 4 5 3 4 2 3 1 2 0 1 0 0
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
interrupt_queue_addr[11:0]
Data Sheet
141
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure For reading the Interrupt Queue refer to Chapter 4.6.3. Each interrupt queue entry identifies a particular statistics counter that has reached its threshold value. The format of the interrupt queue entries is as follows: 31 Not used 23 Not used 15 iq_ne 7 not used port_nr [2:0] 8 channel_ nr[4] 0 16 24
channel_nr[3:0]
counter_nr[3:0]
iq_ne
interrupt queue not empty 0= 1= interrupt queue is empty, no further entries interrupt queue is not empty, further entries can be read
6.2.4
Timers
Read/write Address 26000H to 2601FH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 16 x 32 bits: 2 timer sets x 8 timers RMADR MPADR 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 1 1 0 0 9 0 8 9 0 7 8 0 6 7 0 5 6 0 4 5 0 3 4 2 3 1 2 0 1 0 0
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
timer_nr[3:0]
timer_nr[3]
Timer number Selects the timer set 0= 1= Timer set 2 indicated on MPIR2 Timer set 1 indicated on MPIR1
timer_nr [2:0]
Data Sheet
Timer number Number of the associated timer
142 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure The format of the timer entries is as follows: 31 Not used 23 Not used 15 timer_en 7 timer_value[7:0] timer_value[14:8] 0 8 16 24
timer_en
Timer enable The timer_en bit can be used by the SW to start/stop/pause the timer. Upon reaching timer_value = 0 the timer_en will be reset to 0 0= 1= Disabled Enabled
timer_value
Timer value When timer_en is set to 1, the timer_value will be decremented every 12 x 512 x TCLOCK (245.8 S if fCLOCK = 25 MHz). The timer_value will stop at 7FFFH indicated by an interrupt status bit in isr1 for timer set 1 or in isr2 for timer set 2.
Note: Internal register bit oamc[tim_set1_en] = 0 will disable all timers in set 1. Internal register bit time[tim_set2_en] = 0 will disable all timers in set 2.
6.2.5
Cell Insertion Buffer
Read/write: Address 26020H to 2603FH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 16 x 32 bits: 1 cell x 16 doublewords MPADR[17:0] 2603FH Not Used 2603CH 301EH RMADR[15:0] 301FH
Data Sheet
143
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure MPADR[17:0] 2603BH ATM Cell Payload 26024H 26023H Not Used 26022H 26021H ATM Header 26020H 3010H 3011H 3012H RMADR[15:0] 301DH
The ATM header to be used for cell insertion has to be programmed at MPADR = 26020H. The format of the ATM Header entry is as follows: 31 VCI[3:0] 23 VCI[11:4] 15 VPI[3:0] 7 GFC[3:0] or VPI[11:8] VPI[7:4] VCI[15:12] 0 8 PTI[2:0] 24
CLP
16
6.2.6
Cell Extraction Buffer
Read/write Address 26040H to 27FFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 8127 x 32 bits: 254 cells x 16 doublewords RMADR MPADR 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 1 1 9 8 9 7 8 6 7 5 6 4 5 3 4 2 3 1 2 0 1 0 0
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
cell_nr[7:0] + 2
double_word [3:0]
Data Sheet
144
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure For reading the extraction buffer, refer to Chapter 4.10. MPADR[17:0] 27FFFH 26060H 2605FH Not Used 2605AH 26059H ATM Cell #1 Payload 26042H 26041H ATM Cell #1 Header 26040H The format of the ATM header entry is as follows: 31 VCI[3:0] 23 VCI[11:4] 15 VPI[3:0] 7 GFC[3:0] or VPI[11:8] VPI[7:4] VCI[15:12] 0 8 PTI[2:0] 24 3020H 3021H 302DH 302CH Cell #254 * Cell #2 3030H 302FH RMADR[15:0] 3FFFH
CLP
16
6.2.7
Segmentation/ATM Receive Buffers
Read/write Address 28000H to 2FFFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size: 16K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 channels x 4 cells x 16 doublewords
Data Sheet
145
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
RMADR MPADR 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 0 1 port_nr [2:0]
9
8 9
7 8
6 7
5 6
4 5
3 4
2 3
1 2
0 1 0 0
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
channel_nr [4:0]
cell_nr [1:0]
double_word [3:0]
6.2.7.1
ATM Receive Buffer
The SW does not need to access the ATM Receive Buffers.
6.2.7.2
Segmentation Buffer
The ATM header to be used for each channel has to be programmed at the address given by:
RMADR MPADR 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 0 1 port_nr[2:0]
9
8 9
7 8
6 7
5 6
4 5
3 4
2 3
1 2
0 1 0 0
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
ref_slot_nr[4:0]
00B
0000B
All other locations should never be accessed as the data changes continuously. The format of the ATM header entry in the cell insertion buffer is as follows: 31 VCI[3:0] 23 VCI[11:4] 15 VPI[3:0] 7 GFC[3:0] or VPI[11:8] VPI[7:4] VCI[15:12] 0 8 PTI[2:0] 24
CLP
16
6.2.8
Reassembly/ATM Transmit Buffers
Read/write Address 30000H to 3FFFFH Reset value: Not applicable. RAM must be reset and initialized via SW Memory size 32K x 32 bits: 8 ports x 32 channels x 8 cells x 16 doublewords
Data Sheet
146
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Memory Structure
RMADR MPADR 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 1 port_nr [2:0]
9
8 9
7 8
6 7
5 6 cell_nr [2:0]
4 5
3 4
2 3
1 2
0 1 0 0
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
channel_nr [4:0]
double_word [3:0]
The SW does not need to access the Reassembly/ATM Transmit Buffers.
Data Sheet
147
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7
Register Description
The internal registers occupy the lowest addresses. Accesses to the internal registers are 16 bit oriented. Entry size = 16 bit Note: N = 0 .. 7 Table 32 MPADR 00000H + N 00008H 00009H 0000AH 0000BH 0000CH 0000DH 0000EH 0000FH 00010H 00011H 00012H 00013H 00014H 00015H 00016H 00017H 00018H 00019H 0001AH 0001BH 0001CH 0001DH 0001EH 0001FH 00020H Internal Registers Width Name 14 16 3 6 16 16 16 16 16 16 9 8 16 1 16 9 8 16 2 8 8 16 8 14 16 16 pcfN acfg oamc catm caal bp32 bp10 atmc rxid txid lpbc cfil imr1 time cdfs vers ckmo isr1 eis1 eis2 eis3 eis4 isr2 opmo ftcs cfvp1 Register Port Configuration Register of Port N ASIC Configuration Register OAM Control Register OAM-Counter Enable Register for ATM Ports OAM-Counter Enable Register for AAL Ports Byte-pattern Register 3 and 2 Byte-pattern Register 1 and 0 ATM Control Register RX Idle/unassigned Cell Control Register TX Idle/unassigned Cell Control Register Loopback Control Register Cell Fill Register for Partially Filled Cells Interrupt Mask Register 1 Timer Enable Register Cell Delineation FSM Status Register Version Register Clock Monitor Register Interrupt Status Register 1 Extended Interrupt Status Register 1 Extended Interrupt Status Register 2 Extended Interrupt Status Register 3 Extended Interrupt Status Register 4 Interrupt Status 2 Register Operation Mode Register FT Clock Select Register Cell Filter VCI Pattern Register 1
Data Sheet
148
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description Table 32 MPADR 00021H 00022H 00023H 00024H 00025H 00026H 00027H 00028H 00029H 0002AH 0002BH 0002CH 0002DH 0002EH 0002FH 00030H 00031H 00032H- 00100H 00101H 00102H 00103H 00104H+ N x 32 00105H+ N x 32 00106H+ N x 32 00107H+ N x 32 00108H+ N x 32 0010CH+ N x 32 0010DH+ N x 32 0010EH+ N x 32 0010FH+ N x 32 00110H 00111H 11 11 9 13 7 7 5 1 14 4 13 12 12 12 irs irm icrcconf condN irsN irmN tsinN conuN avbN asfN tiniN treshN per scri Internal Registers Width Name 16 16 16 12 5 8 16 14 16 16 4 16 16 16 16 16 16 cfvm1 cfvp2 cfvm2 cfpt cmd cfrp thrshld utconf cas1 cas2 cas3 thrshp01 thrshp23 thrshp45 thrshp67 eis0 lcdtimer Register Cell Filter VCI Mask Register 1 Cell Filter VCI Pattern Register 2 Cell Filter VCI Mask Register 2 Cell Filter Payload Type Register Command Register Cell Filter Read Pointer Threshold Register UTOPIA Configuration Register CAS 1 Register CAS 2 Register CAS 3 Register Threshold Register Ports 0 and 1 Threshold Register Ports 2 and 3 Threshold Register Ports 4 and 5 Threshold Register Ports 6 and 7 Extended Interrupt Status Register 0 LCD Timer Register Unused Interrupt Source Register Interrupt Mask Register ICRC Configuration Register Configuration Downstream Register of Port N Interrupt Source of Port N Interrupt Mask of Port N Test input Register of Port N Configuration Upstream Register of Port N Average Buffer Filling of Port N ACM Shift Factor of Port N Time of Initial Free Run of Port N Threshold Out Of Lock Detection of Port N Parity Errors at Clock Recovery Interface Synchronization Errors at Clock Recovery Interface
149 2002-05-06
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description Table 32 MPADR 00112H 00113H 00114H+ N x 32 00115H+ N x 32 00116H+ N x 32 00117H+ N x 32 00118H+ N x 32 00119H+ N x 32 0011AH+ N x 32 0011BH+ N x 32 Internal Registers Width Name 12 12 8 8 8 8 8 3 3 5 crifo icrcv sruN sroN srrN sriN atlN oolN statN tsoutN Register ICRC Clock Recovery Interface FIFO Overflow ICRC Version Register SRTS FIFO Underflow of Port N SRTS FIFO Overflow of Port N SRTS Generator Reset of Port N SRTS Invalid Value Processed of Port N ACM Data Too Late of Port N Out of Lock Register of Port N Status Register of ICRC of Port N Test Output Register of Port N
Data Sheet
150
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.1
Port Configuration Registers (pcfN)
Read/write Address 00000H + N Reset value: 0000. 15 Not used 7 p_srts p_slp p_ulp p_dlp p_rx_act p_rx_em p_tx_act 8
p_cell_ disc
p_thr_m[1:0]
p_cas
p_atm
p_ces
p_acm 0 p_tx_mfs
p_cell_disc
Port Cell Discard Enable X= 0= When p_atm = 0 or acfg.a_hec_mode = 0 Port in IMA mode: No cell discard upon detection of uncorrectable HEC error. The MSB in the UDF field of the ATM cell header at UTOPIA interface will indicate the results of the HEC check Port in standard mode: Cell discard upon detection of uncorrectable HEC error
1= p_thr_m
Port threshold mode This bit is relevant in ATM mode (p_atm=1) only. 00 = Port specific backpressure to UTOPIA is disabled. Entering this value causes a reset of the corresponding filling level counter. Resetting this counter during operation may result in an inappropriate backpressure. Port specific backpressure to UTOPIA is enabled Crossing the value defined in thrspN will result in port specific backpressure. Values can range from 0 to 255 cells. Port specific backpressure to UTOPIA is enabled Crossing the value defined in thrspN will result in port specific backpressure. The amount of bytes defining the threshold value equals 53 * C + B. With C representing the 2 most significant bits of thrspN and B representing the 6 least significant bits of thrspN. Values can range from 0 to 222 bytes. Port specific backpressure to UTOPIA is disabled Disabled
01 =
10 =
11 = p_cas 0=
Port CAS enable
Data Sheet
151
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description 1= p_atm 0= 1= p_ces X= 0= 1= p_acm X= 0= 1= p_srts Enabled AAL (CES) mode port ATM (PHY) mode port When p_atm = 1 Structured (N x 64 kbit/s) Unstructured When p_atm = 1 Disabled Enabled
Port ATM mode
Port circuit emulation service
Port ACM enable
Port SRTS enable For the PXB4220 this bit enables SRTS clock recovery. This is only useful for AAL ports in unstructured CES. For the PXB4221 this bit is tied to "0". Writing "1" has no effect. X= 0= 1= When p_atm = 1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
p_slp
Port serial loopback enable 0= 1=
p_ulp
Port upstream UTOPIA loopback (works even if UTOPIA interface is disabled) 0= 1= Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
p_dlp
Port downstream UTOPIA loopback 0= 1=
p_rx_act
Port receive activate 0= 1=
Data Sheet
152
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description p_rx_em Port receive emergency mode Enables the automatic switch over to emergency mode 0= 1= p_tx_act 0= 1= p_tx_mfs Disabled Enabled Disabled (Framer outputs tristated) Enabled
Port transmit activate
Port transmit multiframe signal at pin FTMFS E1/T1 = 0: 0= 1= 0= 1= T1 Superframe mode (12 frames = 1.5 ms) T1 Extended superframe mode (24 frames = 3 ms) E1 Double frame mode (2 frames = 250 s) E1 CRC multiframe mode (16 frames = 2 ms)
E1/T1 = 1:
Data Sheet
153
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.2
ASIC Configuration Register (acfg)
Read/write Address 00008H Reset value: 0000H 15 a_icrc_ dwn 7 a_dummy_rts[2:0] a_emg_bpslct[1:0] a_ovf_ cnt_en a_ptr_ prty 8
a_hec_ algor
a_hec_ mode
a_sw_ reset
a_ut_en
a_ur_en a_crv_en
a_dummy _rts[3]
0 a_even_ pck
a_icrc_dwn
ICRC power down Once the SRTS block is switched off, it can only be enabled by hardware reset of the whole device. 0= 1= 0= 1= Enabled Disabled HEC algorithm according to ITU-T HEC algorithm according to ATM Forum
a_hec_algor HEC detection, correction
a_hec_ mode
Handling in case of faulty HEC 0= 1= Standard mode: Cell discard upon detection of uncorrectable HEC error as defined in pcfN.p_cell_disc
a_sw_reset
Software reset Reset registers 0000H to 0031H including this bit. 0= 1= Normal Reset Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
154 2002-05-06
a_ut_en
UTOPIA transmit enable 0= 1=
a_ur_en
UTOPIA receive enable 0= 1=
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description a_crv_en Clock recovery interface enable 0= 1= a_dummy_ rts a_emg_ bpslct Disabled Enabled
Dummy RTS value Dummy RTS value that will be transmitted in the first and second SRTS period after start of segmentation. Emergency byte-pattern select 00 = 01 = 10 = 11 = Byte-pattern 0, defined in bp10[bp0] selected Byte-pattern 1, defined in bp10[bp1] selected Byte-pattern 2, defined in bp32[bp2] selected Byte-pattern 3, defined in bp32[bp3] selected
a_ovf_cnt_ en
Output queue overflow counter enable 0= 1= Disabled Enabled Disabled: Fixed value in bit 7 of pointer field: "0". Enabled (recommended) Odd parity check enabled (default operation) The parity checkers expect the normal parity. Even parity check enabled The parity checkers expect the inverse parity. This mode tests the proper operation of the parity generators/checkers.
a_ptr_prty
SDT pointer even parity generation 0= 1= 0= 1=
a_even_pck Even parity check for internal/external RAM and UTOPIA
Data Sheet
155
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.3
OAM Control Register (oamc)
Read/write Address 00009H Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 Not used tim_ set1_en dest_ read 0 oam_ act 8
tim_set1_en Timer set 1 enable 0= 1= dest_read 0= 1= Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled: OAM counter values in the external RAM are reset after being read by the micro-processor. (Only accepted if "oam_act" = 1) The protocol monitoring is disabled and the microprocessor can read and write the complete external RAM for test. The protocol monitoring is enabled and the RAM arbiter grants both the protocol monitoring and the microprocessor access to the external RAM. Reading any address of Interrupt Queue by the microprocessor always yields the first interrupt in the queue.
Destructive read mode
oam_act
OAM active 0= 1=
Data Sheet
156
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.4
OAM-Counter Enable Register for ATM Ports (catm)
Read/write Address 0000AH Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 Not used 5 cnt_atm_en[5:0] 0 8
cnt_atm_en
OAM-counter enable for ATM ports X= 0= 1= When pcfN[p_atm] = 0 Disabled Enabled
Data Sheet
157
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.5
OAM-Counter Enable Register for AAL Ports (caal)
Read/write Address 0000BH Reset value: 0000H 15 cnt_aal_en[15:8] 7 cnt_aal_en[7:0] 0 8
cnt_aal_en
OAM-counter enable for AAL ports X= 0= 1= When pcfN[p_atm] = 1 Disabled Enabled
Data Sheet
158
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.6
Byte-Pattern Register bp3 and bp2 (bp32)
Read/write Address 0000CH Reset value: FFFFH 15 bp3[7:0] 7 bp2[7:0] 0 8
bp3 bp2
Byte-pattern 3 Byte-pattern 2
Data Sheet
159
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.7
Byte-Pattern Register bp1 and bp0 (bp10)
Read/write Address 0000DH Reset value: FFFFH 15 bp1[7:0] 7 bp0[7:0] 0 8
bp1 bp0
Byte-pattern 1 Byte-pattern 0
Data Sheet
160
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.8
ATM Control Register (atmc)
Read/write Address 0000EH Reset value: 7655H 15 alpha[3:0] 7 coset[7:0] delta[3:0] 0 8
alpha delta coset
Number of consecutive incorrect HEC (SYNC HUNT) Number of consecutive correct HEC (PRESYNC SYNC)
Coset value x-ored with HEC
Data Sheet
161
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.9
RX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (rxid)
Read/write Address 0000FH Reset value: 0101H 15 prg_rx_hd[7:4] 7 msk_rx_hd[7:0] prg_rx_hd[3:0] 0 8
prg_rx_hd prg_rx_hd msk_rx_hd
Programmable RX idle/unassigned cell header octet 1[7:4] 00H according to I.361 Programmable RX idle/unassigned cell header octet 4[3:0] 01H according to I.361 Mask RX idle/unassigned cell header bits Each bit masks the corresponding bit in prg_rx_hd 0= 1= Not masked: Masked
Note: Other header bits must be zero
Data Sheet
162
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.10
TX Idle/Unassigned Cell Control Register (txid)
Read/write Address 00010H Reset value: 016AH 15 prg_tx_hd[7:4] 7 prg_tx_pl[7:0] prg_tx_hd[3:0] 0 8
prg_tx_hd prg_tx_hd prg_tx_pl
Programmable TX idle/unassigned cell header octet 1[7:4] 00H according to I.361 Programmable TX idle/unassigned cell header octet 4[3:0] 01H according to I.361 Programmable TX idle/unassigned cell payload octet 6AH according to I.432
Note: Other header bits are fixed to zero
Data Sheet
163
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.11
Loopback Control Register (lpbc)
Read/write Address 00011H Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 tulp tdlp vci_flt_ ulp vci_val_ulp[4:0] 8 tslp 0
t
tslp
Transparent serial loop 0= 1= Non-transparent Transparent When pcfN[p_atm] = 1 Non-transparent Transparent Non-transparent Transparent Disabled (all VCIs are looped) Enabled (VCI selected by vci_val_ulp is looped)
tulp
Transparent upstream UTOPIA loop X= 0= 1=
tdlp
Transparent downstream UTOPIA loop 0= 1=
vci_flt_ulp
VCI filter enable for upstream UTOPIA loop 0= 1=
vci_val_ulp
5 LSB of the VCI value (i.e. channel number) to be looped on upstream UTOPIA loop
Note: Transparent loop: Data is looped and forwarded. Non-transparent loop: Data is looped. Note: For ATM ports with upstream UTOPIA loopback (pcfN[p_atm] = 1 and pcfN[p_ulp] = 1), all cells are looped regardless of their VCI value. The vci_flt_ulp and vci_val_ulp[4:0] bits are don't care.
Data Sheet
164
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.12
Cell Fill Register for Partially Filled Cells (cfil)
Read/write Address 00012H Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 cfil[7:0] 0 8
cfil
Dummy fill octet for partially filled cells
Data Sheet
165
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.13
Interrupt Mask Register 1 (imr1)
Read/write Address 00013H Reset value: FFFFH 15 imr1[15:8] 7 imr1[7:0] 0 8
imr1
Each bit masks the corresponding bit in isr1 0= 1= Not masked Masked
Data Sheet
166
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.14
Timer Enable Register (time)
Read/write Address 00014H Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 Not used 0 tim_set2 _en 8
tim_set2_en Timer set 2 enable 0= 1= Disabled Enabled
Data Sheet
167
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.15
Cell Delineation FSM Status Register (cdfs)
Read only Address 00015H Reset value: 0000H 15 status_p7[1:0] 7 status_p3[1:0] status_p2[1:0] status_p1[1:0] status_p6[1:0] status_p5[1:0] 8 status_p4[1:0] 0 status_p0[1:0]
status_pN
Cell Delineation FSM status of port N XX = When pcfN[p_atm] = 0 00 = 01 = 10 = Hunt Presync Sync
Data Sheet
168
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.16
Read only 15
Version Register (vers)
Address 00016H 9 Not used 8 mtypsel 0 e1/t1 version[5:0]
7 ec
mtypsel
Microcontroller type select 0= 1= Microcontroller Interface runs in Intel Mode Microcontroller Interface runs in Motorola Mode Echo Cancellation mode(EC) Normal operation mode T1 mode E1 mode
ec
Status of EC pin 0= 1=
e1/t1
Status of E1/T1 pin 0= 1=
version
Version of IWE8 Value of 011 010B for Version 3.2
Data Sheet
169
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.17
Clock Monitor Register (ckmo)
Read only Address 00017H Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 frclk_failure[7:0] 0 8
frclk_failure FRCLK clock failure on port N Bit remains active only as long as a clock failure on FRCLK is detected. 0= 1= False True
Data Sheet
170
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.18
Interrupt Status Register 1 (isr1)
Read only, Address 00018H Reset value: 0000H 15 iq_ne 7 Not used ut_soc ut_par ex_par crv_par oq_ovf eq_ovf eis4 eis3 eis2 eis1 eis0 Not used 0 ck_eme 8
iq_ne
Interrupt queue not empty 0= 1= False True False True False True False True False True False True
eis4
A bit is set in eis4 0= 1=
eis3
A bit is set in eis3 0= 1=
eis2
A bit is set in eis2 0= 1=
eis1
A bit is set in eis1 0= 1=
eis0
A bit is set in eis0 0= 1=
ut_soc
UTOPIA start of cell error, indicates if SOC is activated too late or twice within one cell cycle. (corresponds to transmit direction in slave mode and receive direction in master mode). 0= 1= False True
171 2002-05-06
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description ut_par ex_par Parity error on UTOPIA bus Parity error on external RAM In order to prevent external RAM parity errors, the external RAM should be written completely during board initialization by the microprocessor. 0= 1= crv_par 0= 1= oq_ovf 0= 1= eq_ovf 0= 1= ck_eme False True False True False True False True
Parity error on clock recovery interface
Output queue overflow
Error queue overflow
Emergency mode state change on one of the emergency mode enabled ports (see ckmo) 0= 1= False True
Note: Bits 6:0 are used for tracing error events. They are set on the occurrence of an error event and reset by a microprocessor read operation. Bits 15:10 Bits are reset upon reading of the interrupt generating register.
Data Sheet
172
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.19
Extended Interrupt Status 1 Register (eis1)
Destructive read Address 00019H Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 Not used cf_fifo_ n_empty 0 cf_fifo_ full 8
cf_fifo_full
Cell filter FIFO full 0= 1= False True
cf_fifo_n_ empty
Cell filter FIFO not empty 0= 1= False True
Data Sheet
173
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.20
Extended Interrupt Status 2 Register (eis2)
Destructive read Address 0001AH Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 rts_overflow[7:0] 0 8
rts_overflow RTS buffer overflow of IWE core at port N Applicable for AAL ports in unstructured CES mode with SRTS. X= 0= 1= When pcfN[p_atm] = 1 or pcfN[p_ces] = 0 or pcfN[p_srts] = 0 False True
Data Sheet
174
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.21
Extended Interrupt Status 3 Register (eis3)
Destructive read Address 0001BH Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 tim_set1_exp[7:0] 0 8
tim_set1_ exp
Timer of set 1 expired Each bit indicates if the corresponding timer expired 0= 1= False True
Data Sheet
175
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.22
Extended Interrupt Status 4 Register (eis4)
Destructive read Address 0001CH Reset value: 0000H 15 ocd_end[7:0] 7 ocd_start[7:0] 0 8
ocd_end
End of OCD (Out of cell delineation) state at port N X= 0= 1= When pcfN[p_atm] = 0 False True When pcfN[p_atm] = 0 False True
ocd_start
Start of OCD (Out of cell delineation) state at port N X= 0= 1=
Data Sheet
176
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.23
Interrupt Status Register 2 (isr2)
Destructive read Address 0001DH Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 tim_set2_exp[7:0]
t
8 0
tim_set2_ exp
Timer of timer set 2 expired Each bit indicates if the corresponding timer expired 0= 1= False True
Data Sheet
177
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.24
Operation Mode Register (opmo)
Read/write Address 0001EH Reset value 1100H
15 Not used 7 bufthr0 tfpp rfpp ftri frri om[1:0] symn rts_gen rts_eval bufthr[3:1] 0 cbb 8
symn
SYMn mode This bit is relevant only in SYM2 and SYM8 0= FRMFB[0] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of all ports. FRMFB[1:7] are unused FRMFB[N] is used for frame and multiframe synchronization in receive and transmit direction of corresponding ports Pin SDI is used for RTS RTS data are generated by ICRC Pins FTCKO are used as transmit clock (FTCKO[0:7] are input pins) Clock of ICRC is used as transmit clock and is also switched to FTCKO pins (FTCKO[0:7] are output pins)
1= rts_gen
RTS generation 0= 1=
rts_eval
RTS evaluation 0= 1=
bufthr
Buffer threshold Determines the threshold for the ATM Transmit Buffer. If the buffer level remains under the threshold the signal ATBTC will be activated. Transmit frame pulse polarity valid for GIM 0= 1= FTMFS is active low FTMFS is active high
tfpp
rfpp
Receive frame pulse polarity valid for GIM, SYM8 and SYM2 0= FRMFB is active low
Data Sheet
178
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description 1= ftri FRMFB is active high
Framer transmit rising edge valid for GIM 0= 1= FTDAT outputs are clocked with the falling edge of FTCKO FTDAT outputs are clocked with the rising edge of FTCKO
frri
Framer receive rising edge valid for GIM: 0= 1= 0= 1= FRDAT inputs are sampled with the falling edge of FRCLK FRDAT inputs are sampled with the rising edge of FRCLK FRDAT inputs are sampled with the falling edge of RFCLK FTDAT outputs are clocked with the rising edge of RFCLK FRDAT inputs are sampled with the rising edge of RFCLK FTDAT outputs are clocked with the falling edge of RFCLK FAM: FALC mode FTCKO and FRCLK running at 8.192 MHz GIM: Generic Interface mode1) FTCKO and FRCLK running at 2.048 (E1) or 1.544 (T1) MHz SYM8: E1 synchronous mode (RFCLK = 8.192 MHz) SYM2: E1 synchronous mode (RFCLK = 2.048 MHz) Normal operation: the external clock at RFCLK in internally doubled to serve as reference clock for the internal DPLL Clock boost function bypassed
valid for SYM2:
om
Operation Mode 00 = 01 = 10 = 11 =
cbb
Clock Boost Bypass 0= 1=
1)
Make sure that no clocks are applied to the transmitter when switching to GIM.
Data Sheet
179
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.25
FT Clock Select Register (ftcs)
Read/write Address 0001FH Reset value 0000H 15 ftck7[1:0] 7 ftck3[1:0] ftck2[1:0] ftck1[1:0] ftck0[1:0] ftck6[1:0] ftck5[1:0] ftck4[1:0] 0 8
ftcki
Clock Source for framer transmit interface valid for FAM and GIM 00 = 01 = 10 = 11 = FTCKOi if opmo[rts_eval]=0 Recovered Clock of ICRC if opmo[rts_eval]=1 FRCLKi Derived from RFCLK No clock
Note: Register opmo has to be set before ftcs is configured.
Data Sheet
180
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.26
Cell Filter VCI Pattern 1 Register (cfvp1)
Read/write Address 20H Reset value: 0000H 15 vci_pattern1[15:8] 7 vci_pattern1[7:0] 0 8
vci_pattern1 First VCI pattern the cell header is compared with.
Data Sheet
181
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.27
Cell Filter VCI Mask 1 Register (cfvm1)
Read/write Address 00021H Reset value: 0000H 15 vci_mask1[15:8] 7 vci_mask1[7:0] 0 8
vci_mask1
Each bit masks the corresponding bit in cfvp1 0= 1= Not masked Masked
Data Sheet
182
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.28
Cell Filter VCI Pattern 2 Register (cfvp2)
Read/write Address 00022H Reset value: 0000H 15 vci_pattern2[15:8] 7 vci_pattern2[7:0] 0 8
vci_pattern2 Second VCI pattern the cell header is compared with.
Data Sheet
183
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.29
Cell Filter VCI Mask 2 Register (cfvm2)
Read/write Address 00023H Reset value: 0000H 15 vci_mask2[15:8] 7 vci_mask2[7:0] 0 8
vci_mask2
Each bit masks the corresponding bit in cfvp2 0= 1= Not masked Masked
Data Sheet
184
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.30
Cell Filter Payload Type Register (cfpt)
Read/write Address 00024H Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 pt_mask2[1:0] pt_pattern1[2:0] pt_mask1[2:0] pt_pattern2[2:0] 8 pt_mask 2[2] 0
pt_mask1
Each bit masks the corresponding bit in pt_pattern1. 0= 1= Not masked Masked
pt_pattern1 pt_mask2
First PT pattern the cell header is compared with. Each bit masks the corresponding bit in pt_pattern2. 0= 1= Not masked Masked
pt_pattern2
Second PT pattern the cell header is compared with.
Data Sheet
185
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.31
Command Register (cmd)
Read/write Address 00025H Reset value 0000H 15 Not used 7 Not used insert_ cell pt2_ comp pt1_ comp vci2_ comp 0 vci1_ comp 8
vci1_comp
VCI comparison corresponding to register cfvp1 and cfvm1. 0= 1= Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
vci2_comp
VCI comparison corresponding to register cfvp2 and cfvm2. 0= 1=
pt1_comp
PT comparison corresponding to fields pt_pattern1 and pt_mask1 in register cfpt. 0= 1= Disabled Enabled
pt2_comp
PT comparison corresponding to fields pt_pattern2 and pt_mask2 in register cfpt. 0= 1= Disabled Enabled
insert_cell
Cell insertion via microprocessor. A cell will be inserted in the data stream as soon as possible; when finished this bit will be reset. 0= 1= Disabled Enabled
Data Sheet
186
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.32
Cell Filter Read Pointer Register (cfrp)
Read/write Address 00026H Reset value 0002H 15 Not used 7 rdptr[7:0] 0 8
rdptr
Read Pointer for the Cell Extraction Buffer 02H to FFH This value is a pointer to the current address, at which the microprocessor will read the next extracted cell from the Cell Extraction Buffer
Data Sheet
187
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.33
Threshold Register (thrshld)
Read/write Address 00027H Reset value 00FFH 15 Not used 7 threshold[7:0] 0 8
threshold
Global ATM transmit buffer threshold for discarding cells 00H to FFH If the amount of cells stored in the ATM transmit buffer crosses this value cells will be discarded.
Data Sheet
188
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.34
UTOPIA Configuration Register (utconf)
Read/write Address 00028H Reset value 0001H 15 Not used 7 utbaseadr[2:0] utlevel utmaster mapping_mode[2:0] utrange[2:0] utprtyen 8 utbaseadr[4:3] 0
utrange
UTOPIA Port Range Controls the supported port range if the device is configured as UTOPIA level 2 PHY-Layer (utlevel=0, utmaster=0, mapping_mode=000B) 000 = 001 = 010 = 011 = 100 = 101 = 110 = 111 = Ports 0 to 7 enabled Port 0 enabled Ports 0 and 1 enabled Ports 0 to 2 enabled Ports 0 to 3 enabled Ports 0 to 4 enabled Ports 0 to 5 enabled Ports 0 to 6 enabled Disabled Enabled
utprtyen
UTOPIA parity check enable 0= 1=
utbaseadr
UTOPIA base address Defines the base address under which the PHY-Layer is accessible. Set to 0 if device utlevel = 1. UTOPIA interface level In Master mode only UTOPIA level 1 is available. 0= 1= UTOPIA level 2 UTOPIA level 1 Slave mode (PHY-Layer) Master mode (ATM-Layer)
utlevel
utmaster
UTOPIA Slave/Master configuration 0= 1=
Data Sheet
189
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description mapping _mode Mapping of the "port_nr" associated with the currently transferred cell into the UTOPIA datastream 000 = 001 = 010 = 011 = 100 = 101 = Disabled Mapping to UDF[2:0] field in ATM header Mapping toVCI[7:5] field in ATM header Mapping toVCI[15:13] field in ATM header Mapping toVPI[7:5] field in ATM header Mapping toGFC[3:1] field in ATM header
Data Sheet
190
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.35
CAS 1 Register (cas1)
Read/write Address 00029H Reset value: BBBBH 15 cas0port3[3:0] 7 cas0port1[3:0] cas0port0[3:0] cas0port2[3:0] 0 8
cas0port0 cas0port1 cas0port2 cas0port3
E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 0 (unused in T1 mode) E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 1 (unused in T1 mode) E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 2 (unused in T1 mode) E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 3 (unused in T1 mode)
Data Sheet
191
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.36
CAS 2 Register (cas2)
Read/write Address 0002AH Reset value: BBBBH 15 cas0port7[3:0] 7 cas0port5[3:0] cas0port4[3:0] cas0port6[3:0] 0 8
cas0port4 cas0port5 cas0port6 cas0port7
E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 4 (unused in T1 mode) E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 5 (unused in T1 mode) E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 6 (unused in T1 mode) E1 CAS frame 0 pattern for port 7 (unused in T1 mode)
Data Sheet
192
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.37
CAS 3 Register (cas3)
Read/write Address 0002BH Reset value: 000DH 15 Not used 7 Not used cas_idle 0 8
cas_idle
CAS idle pattern for unused timeslots of the Tx frame
Data Sheet
193
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.38
Threshold Register for Ports 0 and 1 (thrsp01)
Read/write Address 0002CH Reset value: FFFFH 15 p_odd[7:0] 7 p_even[7:0] 0 8
p_odd p_even
Port 1 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx Port 0 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx
Data Sheet
194
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.39
Threshold Register for Ports 2 and 3 (thrsp23)
Read/write Address 0002DH Reset value: FFFFH 15 p_odd[7:0] 7 p_even[7:0] 0 8
p_odd p_even
Port 3 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx Port 2 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx
Data Sheet
195
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.40
Threshold Register for Ports 4 and 5 (thrsp45)
Read/write Address 02EH Reset value: FFFFH 15 p_odd[7:0] 7 p_even[7:0] 0 8
p_odd p_even
Port 5 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx Port 4 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx
Data Sheet
196
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.41
Threshold Register for Ports 6 and 7 (thrsp67)
Read/write Address 0002FH Reset value: FFFFH 15 p_odd[7:0] 7 p_even[7:0] 0 8
p_odd p_even
Port 7 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx Port 6 threshold for backpressure of UTOPIA Tx
Data Sheet
197
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.42
Extended Interrupt Status 0 Register (eis0)
Destructive Read Address 00030H Reset value: 0000H 15 lcd_end[7:0] 7 lcd_start[7:0] 0 8
lcd_end
End of LCD detect on port N 0= 1= False True False True
lcd_start
Start of LCD detect on port N 0= 1=
Data Sheet
198
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.43
LCD Timer Register (lcdtimer)
Read/write Address 00031H Reset value: FFFFH 15 lcd_val[14:7] 7 lcd_val[6:0] 0 lcd_dis 8
lcd_val
LCD timer preload value The port specific LCD timer is pre-loaded with 128 * lcd_val and clocked with CLOCK. After expiration an interrupt is issued in eis0. LCD timer disable
lcd_dis
0= 1=
Enabled Disabled
Data Sheet
199
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.44
Interrupt Source Register (irs)
Read only Address 00101H Reset value: 0000H 15 Not used 7 irs4 irs3 irs2 irs1 irs0 crifo scri irs7 irs6 8 irs5 0 per
irsN
IRS register of port N These bits indicate if a bit is set in irsN 0= 1= False True
crifo
Clock recovery interface FIFO overflow This bit indicates if a bit is set in crifo 0= 1= False True
scri
Synchronization errors at the internal clock recovery interface This bit indicates if a bit is set in scri 0= 1= False True
per
Parity errors at the clock recovery interface. This bit indicates if a bit is set in per 0= 1= False True
Bits are reset after reading the corresponding registers.
Data Sheet
200
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.45
Interrupt Mask (irm)
Read/Write Address 00102H Reset value: 07FFH 15 Not used 7 irm4 irm3 irm2 irm1 irm0 crifo scri irm7 irm6 8 irm5 0 per
irmN
Each bit masks the corresponding irsN in irs 0= 1= Not masked Masked Not masked Masked Not masked Masked Not masked Masked
crifo
This bit masks the bit crifo in irs 0= 1=
scri
This bit masks the bit scri in irs. 0= 1=
per
This bit masks the bit per in irs 0= 1=
Data Sheet
201
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.46
Internal Clock (icrcconf)
Recovery
Circuit
Configuration
Register
Read/Write Address 00103H Reset value: 0020H 15 Not used 7 ds1 parc pdcri srst lptd lptu lprd 8 gim 0 lpru
gim
Generic interface mode 0= 1= FAM: 8.192 MHz is expected/generated. GIM: 2.048 MHz (E1) or 1.544 MHz (T1) expected/generated. E1: The receive clocks are divided to 2.048 MHz. Output clocks are 8.192 MHz in case of FAM or 2.048 MHz in case of GIM. T1: The receive clocks are divided to 1.544 MHz. Output clocks are 8.192 MHz in case of FAM or 1.544 MHz in case of GIM.
ds1
DS1 Mode 0= 1=
parc
Parity Check Inverts all parity bits in the ICRC. All enabled parity checkers will generate interrupts 0= 1= Disabled Enabled Normal operation The internal clock recovery interface is put in power down mode. No data is received, no errors are generated and the parity check is disabled.
pdcri
Power Down Clock Recovery Interface 0= 1=
srst
Software Reset The bit srts is set by the software, but reset by the ICRC. Reading this bit will always give the Reset value: "0". 0= 1= Normal operation Reset ICRC
lptd
Loop back clock recovery interface transmitted data downstream
Data Sheet
202
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description 0= 1= lptu 0= 1= lprd 0= 1= lpru 0= 1= Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Loop back clock recovery interface transmitted data upstream
Loop back clock recovery interface received data downstream
Loop back clock recovery interface received data upstream
Data Sheet
203
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.47
Configuration Register Downstream of Port N (condN)
Read/Write Address 00104H + N x 32 Reset value: 0840H 15 not used 7 tur(0] pwd lgc lc8 lgs lpcr srt tur[5:1] 0 acm 8
tur
Tuning range select of port N The tuning range of PLL-ACM is limited to: (frequency deviation of pin RFCLK in ppm) +/- ((4*tur) +/-5%)ppm. Power down of port N 0= 1= Normal operation Power down mode. No RTS values and no transmit clock are generated. Normal operation The clock generated by the PLL is looped into the RTS generator. Normal operation The receive clock is looped to the transmit output of the ICRC. Normal operation Generated RTS values are looped into the SRTS Receive FIFO. Normal operation The clock recovery interface is bypassed. RTS values from the frame receiver are looped into the SRTS Transmit FIFO. The PLL is put in power down mode, and a free running clock is generated. In case pwd is set, all circuits of the port, including the RTS generator are disabled, no output clock is generated and all error counters are reset.
204 2002-05-06
pwd
lgc
Loop back generated clock 0= 1=
lc8
Loop back clock 8.192 MHz 0= 1=
lgs
Loop back generated RTS 0= 1=
lpcr
Loop back clock recovery Interface 0= 1=
srt, acm
Selectors for the clock generation algorithm 00 =
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description 01 = 10 = 11 = Transmit clock generation of this port is based on the adaptive clock algorithm Transmit clock generation of this port is based on the SRTS algorithm. Transmit clock generation of this port is based on both algorithms. The tuning range of PLL-ACM can not be reduced (tur), because PLL-ACM has to accept the jitter passed through or generated in PLL-SRTS.
Data Sheet
205
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.48
Read only
Interrupt Source of Port N (irsN)
Address 00105H + N x 32
Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 not used srrn tsoutn srun sron srin atln 0 ooln 8
srrn
A bit is set in srrn. 0= 1= False True False True False True False True False True False True False True
tsoutn
A bit is set in tsoutN. 0= 1=
srun
A bit is set in sruN 0= 1=
sron
A bit is set in sroN. 0= 1=
srin
A bit is set in sriN. 0= 1=
atln
A bit is set in atlN. 0= 1=
ooln
A bit is set in oolN. 0= 1=
Bits are reset upon reading of the interrupt generating register.
Data Sheet
206
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.49
Interrupt Mask of Port N (irmN)
Read/Write Address 00106H + N x 32 Reset value: 007FH 15 not used 7 not used srrn tsoutn srun sron srin atln 0 ooln 8
srrn
This bit masks the bit srrN in irsN 0= 1= Not masked Masked Not masked Masked Not masked Masked Not masked Masked Not masked Masked Not masked Masked Not masked Masked
tsoutn
This bit masks the bit tsoutN in irsN 0= 1=
srun
This bit masks the bit sruN in irsN. 0= 1=
sron
This bit masks the bit sroN in irsN 0= 1=
srin
This bit masks the bit sriN in irsN 0= 1=
atln
This bit masks the bit atlN in irsN 0= 1=
ooln
This bit masks the bit oolN in irsN 0= 1=
Data Sheet
207
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.50
Test Input of Port N (tsinN)
Read/Write Address 00107H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 not used rtsi[3:0] 0 ena 8
rtsi ena
RTS Input value of port N Test Input Enable Disconnect the RTS generator from the transmit FIFO. Each write command to this register injects the value rtsi into the transmit FIFO. 0= 1= Disabled Enabled:
Successive writes to this register should have a minimum distance of 8 x 32 x TCLOCK. This is the (maximum) time needed to transmit the value rtsi to the clock recovery. In case bit lgs of register condN is set, this waiting time is not necessary.
Data Sheet
208
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.51
Configuration Register Upstream Direction of Port N (conuN)
Read/Write Address 00108H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 not used
.
8 0 rtsg
rtsg
RTS generator enable 0= 1=
Disabled Enabled
Data Sheet
209
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.52
Average Buffer Filling of Port N (avbN)
Read/Write Address 0010CH + N x 32 Reset value: 2000H 15 not used 7 avb[7:0] avb[13:8] 0 8
avb
Average buffer filling of port N This field defines the number of bytes ACM should try to keep in the data buffer of the clock recovery. This value should correspond with the number of bytes the clock recovery initially stores in the data buffer.
Data Sheet
210
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.53
ACM Shift Factor of Port N (asfN)
Read/Write Address 0010DH + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 not used dir ampl[2:0] 0 8
dir
Direction of shifting 0= 1= shift left = amplification shift right = attenuation
ampl
Amplitude of shifting This defines the loop-gain of PLL-ACM. It is equivalent to a multiplication with (or a division by) 2ampl.
Data Sheet
211
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.54
Time of Initial Free Run of Port N (tiniN)
Read/Write Address 0010EH + N x 32 Reset value: 0400H 15 not used 7 tini[7:0] tini[12:8] 0 8
tini[12:0] Time of initial free run of port N
Data Sheet
212
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.55
Threshold Out of Lock Detection of Port N (tresh)
Read/Write Address 0010FH + N x 32 Reset value: 0111H 15 not used 7 tr_srts[3:0] tr_acm[3:0] tr_filt[3:0] 0 8
tr_filt
Threshold for out of lock detection of PLL-FILTER If more than tr_filt out of lock detections during 16 SRTS periods (128 ATM cells) are made, oolN[olf] is set Threshold for out of lock detection of PLL-SRTS If more than tr_srts out of lock detections during 16 SRTS periods (128 ATM cells) are made, oolN[ols] is set Threshold for out of lock detection of PLL-ACM If more than tr_acm out of lock detections during 16 ATM cells are made, oolN[ola] is set.
tr_srts
tr_acm
Data Sheet
213
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.56
ICRC Parity Errors at Clock Recovery Interface (per)
Destructive read Address 00110H Reset value: 0000H 15 perd[7:0] 7 peru[7:0] 0 8
perd
Parity Errors at the Clock Recovery Interface Downstream Pin SDOD This field counts the amount of parity errors at the internal clock recovery interface. In case there are more than 255 errors, the value is kept Parity Errors at the Clock Recovery Interface Upstream Pin SDI This field counts the amount of parity errors at the internal clock recovery interface. In case there are more than 255 errors, the value is kept
peru
Note: A synchronization error (scri) generates a random number of parity errors
Data Sheet
214
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.57
ICRC Synchronization Errors at Clock Recovery Interface (scri)
Destructive read Address 00111H Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 scri[7:0] 0 8
scri
Synchronization Error at the Clock Recovery Interface This field counts the amount of synchronization errors at the internal clock recovery interface. In case there are more than 255 errors, the value is kept
Note: A synchronization error (scri) generates a random number of parity errors (per)
Data Sheet
215
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.58
ICRC Clock Recovery Interface FIFO Overflow (crifo)
Destructive read Address 00112H Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 crifo[7:0] 0 8
crifo
Clock Recovery Interface FIFO Overflow This field counts the number of times the SRTS transmit FIFO overflows. In case there are more than 255 errors, the value is kept
Data Sheet
216
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.59
ICRC Version Register (icrcv)
Read only Address 00113H Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 not used ver[2:0] rel[2:0] 0 8
ver rel
Version Number Release Number
Data Sheet
217
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.60
SRTS Receive FIFO Underflow of Port N (sruN)
Destructive read Address 00114H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 sru[7:0] 0 8
sru
SRTS Receive FIFO underflow of port N This field counts the amount of underflows of the SRTS Receive FIFO. Upon reaching FFH it keeps its value.
Data Sheet
218
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.61
SRTS Receive FIFO Overflow of Port N (sroN)
Destructive read Address 00115H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 sro[7:0] 0 8
sro
SRTS Receive FIFO overflow of port N This field counts the amount of overflows of the SRTS Receive FIFO. Upon reaching FFH it keeps its value.
Data Sheet
219
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.62
SRTS Generator Reset of Port N (srrN)
Destructive read Address 00116H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 srr[7:0] 0 8
srr
SRTS generator reset command counter of port N This field counts the number of times the SRTS generator is reset by frame receiver 1. Upon reaching FFH it keeps its value.
Data Sheet
220
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.63
SRTS Invalid Value Processed of Port N (sriN)
Destructive read Address 00117H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 sri[7:0] 0 8
sri
SRTS invalid value processed counter of port N This field counts the number of times PLL-SRTS and PLL-FILTER went in hold over due to invalid RTS values. Upon reaching FFH it keeps its value.
Data Sheet
221
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.64
ACM Data Too Late of Port N (atlN)
Destructive read Address 00118H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 atl[7:0] 0 8
atl
ACM data too late error counter of port N This field counts the number of times the next ACM data arrived more than 10 ms too late. Upon reaching FFH it keeps its value.
Data Sheet
222
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.65
Out Of Lock Register of Port N (oolN)
Destructive read Address 00119H + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 8
7
not used olf ols
0
ola
olf
PLL-Filter out of lock at port N This bit indicates that the number of times PLL-FILTER went out of lock exceeds treshN[tr_filt]. 0= 1= False True
ols
PLL-SRTS out of lock at port N This bit indicates that the number of times PLL-SRTS went out of lock exceeds treshN[tr_srts]. 0= 1= False True
ola
PLL-ACM out of lock at port N This bit indicates that the number of times PLL-ACM went out of lock exceeds treshN[tr_acm]. 0= 1= False True
Data Sheet
223
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.66
Status Register of Port N (statN)
Destructive read Address 0011AH + N x 32 Reset value: 0001H 15 not used 7 not used max hov 0 frr 8
max
Maximum frequency deviation Indicates that PLL-ACM is clipped at its maximum frequency deviation. 0= 1= False True
hov
Hold over Indicates that PLL-SRTS is put in hold over because of error conditions in the SRTS processing. 0= 1= False True
frr
Free running clock Indicates that PLL-SRTS or PLL-ACM is put in free run during start-up. 0= 1= False True
Data Sheet
224
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Register Description
7.67
Test Output Register of Port N (tsoutN)
Destructive read Address 0011BH + N x 32 Reset value: 0000H 15 not used 7 not used rtso[3:0] 0 dav 8
rtso
RTS test output value of port N If bit ena from register tsinN is set: RTS value at the output of the SRTS Receive FIFO of this port. Data available SRTS Receive FIFO of this port is not empty 0= 1= False True
dav
Note: By verifying bit dav, the SRTS Receive FIFO can be read completely by successive reads of this register.
Data Sheet
225
2002-05-06
8
8.1
Figure 38
PINS
Data Sheet
Mode
BITS (cbb=0)
Clock Concept
Application Hints
Clock Concept
CLK52 unused unused unused 51.84 MHz +/- 250ppm unused unused unused unused unused 51.84 MHz +/- 250ppm unused unused unused unused unused unused unused unused 51.84 MHz +/- 250ppm unused unused unused unused unused 51.84 MHz +/- 250ppm unused unused unused unused unused CLOCK 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz 12*FDATA < FCLOCK < 39MHz unused unused unused RXCLK TXCLK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK <= CLOCK unused unused unused
226
E1 / T1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
Framer Interface FAM FAM FAM FAM FAM FAM GIM GIM GIM GIM GIM GIM SYM8 SYM2 EC FAM FAM FAM FAM FAM FAM GIM GIM GIM GIM GIM GIM SYM8 SYM2 EC
Clock Recovery none none none SRTS ACM ECRC none none none SRTS ACM ECRC none none none none none none SRTS ACM ECRC none none none SRTS ACM ECRC none none none
om 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 10 11 x 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 10 11 x
rts_ ftcki eval RFCLK FRCLK[0:7] FTCKO[0:7] 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz 01 01 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz FRCLK[0:7] 10 01 32.768 MHz 8.192 MHz 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 50ppm 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ICRC 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 130ppm 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ICRC 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ECRC 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 2.048 MHz 2.048 MHz 01 01 32.768 MHz OEC 2.048 MHz FRCLK[0:7] 10 01 32.768 MHz 2.048 MHz RFCLK / 16 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 50ppm 2.048 MHz 2.048 MHz from ICRC 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 130ppm 2.048 MHz 2.048 MHz from ICRC 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 2.048 MHz 2.048 MHz from ECRC x x 8.192 MHz FIC unused unused x x 2.048 MHz FIC unused unused x x 8.192 MHz FIC unused unused 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz 01 01 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz FRCLK[0:7] 10 01 32.768 MHz 8.192 MHz 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 50ppm 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ICRC 00 01 32.768 MHz +/- 130ppm 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ICRC 00 00 32.768 MHz OEC 8.192 MHz 8.192 MHz from ECRC 00 00 24.704 MHz OEC 1.544 MHz 1.544 MHz 01 01 24.704 MHz OEC 1.544 MHz FRCLK[0:7] 10 01 24.704 MHz 1.544 MHz RFCLK / 16 00 01 24.704 MHz +/- 50ppm 1.544 MHz 1.544 MHz from ICRC 00 01 24.704 MHz +/- 130ppm 1.544 MHz 1.544 MHz from ICRC 00 00 24.704 MHz OEC 1.544 MHz 1.544 MHz from ECRC x x unused unused unused x x unused unused unused x x unused unused unused
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
FIC = Framer Interface Clock for Rx and Tx; OEC = Optional Emergency Clock; x = Don't care; ECRC = External Clock Recovery Circuit;
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints The PLLs for SRTS accept RFCLK deviations of at least + and - 50 ppm. However, in case of switchover to emergency mode, RFCLK will be used to generate the line clock, which has to fulfill specifications like "maximum 4.6 ppm deviation under ALL circumstances". In this case RFCLK accuracy has to be 4.6 ppm.
Data Sheet
227
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
8.2
Translating AAL Statistics Counters into the ATM Forum CES Version 2 MIB
Reset Statistics Counters and P RAM variables before connection setup atmfCESReassCells Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #2 destructive read accesses atmfCESHdrErrors Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #6 destructive read accesses atmfCESPointerReframes CES Version 2.0 MIB recommends "This records the count of the number of events in which the AAL1 reassembler found that an SDT pointer is not where it is expected, and the pointer must be reacquired." "Pointer is not where it is expected" can mean. a) no pointer occurs within an 8-cell-cycle b) two pointers occur within an 8-cell-cycle c) pointer is not in the 2nd byte of ATM cell payload, Error case a) and b) causes incrementation of Statistics Counter #11. All error cases a), b) and c) causes loss of synchronization of AtmStartOfStructure (IWE8 reassembly buffer read pointer to structure start in ATM cell) with PortStartOfStructure (pointer to structure start in framer interface port), so that Statistics Counter #14 increments. ==> Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #14 destructive read accesses. atmfCESPointerParityErrors Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #10 destructive read accesses atmfCESAal1SeqErrors Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #7 destructive read accesses atmfCESLostCells Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #15 destructive read accesses atmfCESMisinsertedCells Accumulated values from IWE8 Statistics Counter #8 destructive read accesses
Data Sheet
228
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints atmfCESBufUnderflows Can be derived from IWE8 Statistics Counter #13 atmfCESBufOverflows Can be derived from IWE8 Statistics Counter #4 atmfCESCellLossStatus Can be derived from atmfCESBufUnderflows and EndOfUnderflow "When cells are continuously lost for the number of milliseconds specified by atmfCESCellLossIntegrationPeriod, the value is set to loss (2). When cells are no longer lost, the value is set to noLoss (1)."
Data Sheet
229
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
8.3
Jitter Characteristics of the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit
This section shows the results of jitter analysis of the ICRC. The device is intended to be used with an external jitter attenuator. For this purpose Infineon's FALC-LH was used. Results are shown with and without jitter attenuator. Measurements were done using a Wandel & Goltermann ANT20 for IWE8 in T1 mode with FALC-LH and Wandel & Goltermann PFJ-8 for the bare IWE8 in E1 or T1 mode.
8.3.1
ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode
The jitter tolerance falls with 20 dB per decade, It is independent from the PLL gain ("ASF"). For the bare device the jitter tolerance meets the requirements of ITU-T G.823 and I.431 at medium and low frequencies. At frequencies lower than 1 KHz the jitter tolerance is more than 20 UI. At high frequencies it is lower than the requirements. In combination with an jitter attenuator the requirements are met. Jitter tolerance at high frequencies is better than 0.2 UI.
ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 m ode, CDV=0, ASF=4 100,0 -50 ppm
10,0 Jitter [UI]
0 ppm
+50 ppm
1,0 ITU G.823 and I.431 0,1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz]
Figure 39
ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator
Data Sheet
230
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
E1, ACM, FALC jitter tolerance, CDV=0, ASF=4 100,0 -50 ppm
10,0
0 ppm
Jitter [UI]
+50 ppm
1,0 ITU G.823 and I.431 0,1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz]
Figure 40
ACM Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator
8.3.2
ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode
The jitter tolerance of the bare device in T1 mode exceeds the capabilities of the measurement equipment. This behavior is independent from frequency offset or PLL gain. Using the jitter attenuator slightly reduces the jitter tolerance to a level which can be measured. All requirements are fulfilled.
Data Sheet
231
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 m ode, CDV=0, ASF=4 100 ITU G.824 and I.431 10 Jitter [UI] TR-NWT-499
1 Measurement limitation 0,1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz]
Figure 41
ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator
ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode, CDV=0, ASF=4 100 -130 ppm
0 ppm 10 Jitter [UI] +130 ppm
1
ITU G.824 and I.431 TR-NWT-499
0,1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz]
Figure 42
ACM Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator
Data Sheet
232
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
8.3.3
SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode
The aliasing effect which is inherent to the SRTS algorithm causes the jitter tolerance at 681 Hz and all multiples of 681 Hz to be a copy of the jitter tolerance at 0 Hz. The jitter tolerance of the bare device meets the requirements of ITU-T G.823 and I.431 only at medium and low frequencies. At high frequencies it is lower than the requirements. In combination with an jitter attenuator the tolerance at high frequencies is better than 0.2 UI. All requirements are met.
SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode -50 ppm
100,0
10,0 Jitter [UI]
0 ppm
+50 ppm
1,0 ITU G.823 and I.431 0,1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Freqency [Hz]
Figure 43
SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator
Data Sheet
233
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode 100 -50 ppm
10 Jitter [UI]
0 ppm
+50 ppm
1 ITU G.823 and I.431 0,1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz]
Figure 44
SRTS Jitter Tolerance in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator
8.3.4
SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode
The aliasing effect which is inherent to the SRTS algorithm causes the jitter tolerance at 513 Hz and all multiples of 513 Hz to be a copy of the jitter tolerance at 0 Hz. Jitter Tolerance at low frequencies violate the requirements. With jitter attenuator jitter tolerance at low frequencies is increased and all jitter frequencies above 20 Hz are removed. As a result no aliasing is possible. The jitter tolerance fulfills the requirements.
Data Sheet
234
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
100
SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode -130 ppm
10
Jiiter [UI]
0 ppm
+130 ppm
1
ITU G.824 and I.431 TR-NWT-499
0,1
1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz]
Figure 45
SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator
SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode
100
-130 ppm
0 ppm 10 Jitter [UI] +130 ppm
1
ITU G.824 and I.431 TR-NWT-499
0,1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Frequency [Hz]
Figure 46
SRTS Jitter Tolerance in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator
Data Sheet
235
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
8.3.5
ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode
The jitter transfer characteristics are much better than the requirements of ITU-T G.735 and I. 432. The -3dB point of the transfer curve is proportional to the PLL-gain: 0.05 Hz for ASF=4, 0.2 Hz for ASF=16. No impact of the jitter attenuator on the already very good jitter transfer behavior could be measured.
ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 mode: ASF=4
10,0 0,0 0,01 -10,0 Transfer [dB] -20,0 -30,0 -40,0 -50,0 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] ITU G.735 and I.431 +50 ppm -50 ppm 0,1 1 10 100 1000 0 ppm
Figure 47
ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator
Data Sheet
236
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
10,0 0,0 0,01 -10,0 Transfer [dB] -20,0 -30,0 -40,0 -50,0 -60,0
ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode: ASF=4 -50 ppm 0,1 1 10 100 1000 0 ppm
+50 ppm
ITU G.735 and I.431 Frequency [Hz]
Figure 48
ACM Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator
8.3.6
ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode
The jitter transfer characteristics are much better than the requirements of ITU-T G.735 and I. 432. The -3dB point of the transfer curve is proportional to the PLL-gain: 0.075 Hz for ASF=4, 0.3 Hz for ASF=16. The jitter attenuator improves the already very good jitter transfer behavior. At -130 ppm all jitter is removed.
Data Sheet
237
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode: ASF=4 10,0 0,0 0,01 -10,0 Transfer [dB] -20,0 -30,0 -40,0 -50,0 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] ITU G.735 and I.431 +130 ppm -130 ppm 0,1 1 10 100 1000 0 ppm
Figure 49
ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator
ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 m ode: ASF=4
10,0 0,0 0,01 -10,0 Transfer [dB] -20,0 -30,0 -40,0 -50,0 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] ITU G.735 and I.431 0 ppm 0,1 1 10 100 1000
+130 ppm
Figure 50
ACM Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator
Data Sheet
238
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
8.3.7
SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode
The aliasing effect which is inherent to the SRTS algorithm causes the jitter transfer at 681 Hz and all multiples of 681 Hz to be a copy of the jitter transfer at 0 Hz. This violates the requirements. The jitter attenuator removes jitter frequencies above 20 Hz. There is no aliasing and the requirements are met.
SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode 10,0 -50 ppm 0,0 0,01 -10,0 Transfer [dB] -20,0 -30,0 -40,0 -50,0 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] ITU G.735 and I.431 +50 ppm 0,1 1 10 100 1000 0 ppm
Figure 51
SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator
Data Sheet
239
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
SRTS Jitter Transfer 10,0 0,0 0,01 -10,0 Transfer [dB] -20,0 -30,0 -40,0 -50,0 -60,0 Frequency [Hz]
-50 ppm
0,1
1
10
100
1000
0 ppm
+50 ppm
ITU G.735 and I.431
Figure 52
SRTS Jitter Transfer in E1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator
8.3.8
SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode
The aliasing effect which is inherent to the SRTS algorithm causes the jitter transfer at 513 Hz and all multiples of 513 Hz to be a copy of the jitter transfer at 0 Hz. This violates the requirements. However, the measurement equipment was not able to measure jitter transfer above 100 Hz and the expected peaking is not measured. The jitter attenuator removes jitter frequencies above 20 Hz. There is no aliasing and the requirements are met.
Data Sheet
240
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Application Hints
SRTS Jitter Transfer 10,0 0,0 0,01 -10,0 Transfer [dB] -20,0 -30,0 -40,0 -50,0 -60,0 Frequency [Hz] +130 ppm -130 ppm
0,1
1
10
100
1000 0 ppm
ITU G.735 and I.431
Figure 53
SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode without Jitter Attenuator
10,0 0,0 0,01 -10,0 Transfer [dB] -20,0 -30,0 -40,0 -50,0 -60,0
SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode 0 ppm 0,1 1 10 100 1000
+130 ppm
ITU G.735 and I.431 Frequency [Hz]
Figure 54
SRTS Jitter Transfer in T1 Mode with Jitter Attenuator
Data Sheet
241
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9
9.1
Table 33 Parameter
Electrical Characteristics
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Absolute Maximum Ratings Symbol TA TJ Tstg VCC VI VO Limit Values -40 to 85 0 to 125 - 65 to 150 - 0.5 to 3.6 - 0.5 to 5.5 - 0.5 to 5.51) Unit
0 0 0
Ambient temperature under bias Junction temperature under bias Storage temperature Supply voltage Input voltage (at any signal pin with respect to ground) Output voltage level (at any signal pin with respect to ground) ESD robustness2) HBM: 1.5 kW, 100 pF
1)
C C C
V V V V
VESD,HBM 1000
The maximum high output level is limited to VCC. Due to 5V I/O tolerance output signals might be pulled to 5V level by external pull-up resistors. According to MIL-Std 883D, method 3015.7 and ESD Ass. Standard EOS/ESD-5.1-1993. The RF Pins 20, 21, 26, 29, 32, 33, 34 and 35 are not protected against voltage stress > 300 V (versus VS or GND). The high frequency performance prohibits the use of adequate protective structures.
2)
Note: Stresses above those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. Exposure to "absolute maximum rating" conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability
Data Sheet
242
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9.2
Parameter
Operating Range
Symbol Min TA VCC VI VO VIL VIH Limit Values Max 85 3.45 5.5 5.5 0.8 5.5 Unit Remarks
Ambient temperature Supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage Input low voltage Input high voltage
-40
3.15 0 0 0 2.1
C
V V V V V 3.3V 5% 5V I/O tolerance
Data Sheet
243
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9.3
Parameter
Thermal Package Characteristics
Symbol RJA(0,25) 25 Limit Values Unit Test conditions
Thermal package resistance junction to ambient without airflow
C/W TA=25C
Data Sheet
244
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9.4
Parameter
DC Characteristics
Symbol Min VIL VIH
1) 1)
Limit Value Max 0.8 5.5 0.4 VCC - 0.6 1 1 10 1 1 40 1 12 130 12 700 0 2.1
Unit Test Condition V V V V A A A A A A A mA VCC = 3.3V, VI = VIL(min) = VSS VCC = 3.3V, VI = VIL(min) = VSS VCC = 3.3V, VI = VIH(VCC) = VCC VCC = 3.3V, inputs at VSS/VCC, no output loads, FCLOCK = 40 MHz VCC = 3.3V, inputs at VSS/VCC, no output loads, FCLOCK = 25 MHz IOL = 4 mA, 8 mA IOH = - 4 mA, - 8 mA VI = VIL(min) = VSS VI = VIH(VCC) = VCC VI = VIH(max) = 5.5 V
Input low voltage Input high voltage Output low voltage Output high voltage
VOL VOH
Low-level input leakage ILLI current High-level input leakage IHLI3.3 IHLI5.5 current High-impedance state output current Pull up current2) Pull up current3) Pull down current4) Power supply current during power-up IOZ IPUA IPUB IPDA ICC PwrUp
Average power supply current 5) Average Power dissipation 5)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
ICC Typ. PTyp.
330 1.10
mA W
All Utopia output buffers are 8 mA. The current is applicable for all pins for which an type PUA has been specified in Chapter 2.2 The current is applicable for all pins for which an type PUB has been specified in Chapter 2.2 The current is applicable for all pins for which an type PDA has been specified in Chapter 2.2 Not tested in production.
The listed characteristics are ensured over the operating range of the integrated circuit. Typical characteristics specify mean values expected over the production spread. If not otherwise specified, typical characteristics apply at Ta = 25 C and the given supply voltage.
Data Sheet
245
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9.5
Parameter
Capacitances
Symbol Min CIN COUT Limit Value Max 10 15 pF pF Unit Test Condition
Input capacitance Output capacitance
Note: The listed characteristics are not tested in production.
Data Sheet
246
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9.6
AC Characteristics
to VIH = 2.4 V for a logical "1" and to VIL = 0.4 V for a logical "0"
TA = -40 to 85 C, VCC = 3.3 V 5%, VSS = 0 V
All inputs are driven
All outputs are measured at VH = 2.0 V for a logical "1"and at VL = 0.8 V for a logical "0" The AC testing input/output waveforms are shown below.
Test Levels
VTH VTL Timing Test Points Device under Test CL
Drive Levels
VIH VIL
Figure 55
Input/Output Waveforms for AC Measurements
9.6.1
Clock and Reset Interface
1
CLOCK
2
CLK52
3
RESET
Figure 56 Table 34 No. 1
Clock and Reset Interface Timing Diagram Clock and Reset Interface AC Timing Characteristics Limit Values Min Typ 40 40 Max 53,97 40,69 ns ns Unit
Parameter TCLOCK: Period CLOCK GIM T1: others:
25,72 25,72
1A
FCLOCK: Frequency CLOCK1)
247 2002-05-06
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics Table 34 No. Clock and Reset Interface AC Timing Characteristics (cont'd) Limit Values Min GIM T1: others: 2 2A 3
1) 2)
Parameter
Unit Max 38,88 38,88 MHz MHz
Typ 25 25 19.29 51.84
18,53 24,58 -50 ppm -50 ppm 3xTCLOCK
TCLK52: Period CLK522) FCLK52: Frequency CLK52 2) Pulse width RESET low
+50 ppm ns +50 ppm MHz
The frequency should be equal or higher than RXCLK and TXCLK of the UTOPIA interface Only required if the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit is used for SRTS
9.6.2 9.6.2.1
Framer Interface Framer Interface in FAM
Framer Receive Interface
1 RFCLK 2 FRCLK 3 FRFRS 4 FRDAT 6 FRMFB 7 5 3
Figure 57
Framer Receive Interface Timing in FAM
Data Sheet
248
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
Table 35 Framer Receive Interface Timing in FAM
No. 1 1A 2 2A 3 4 5 6 7
1)
Parameter TRFCLK: Period RFCLK TFRCLK: Period FRCLK FFRCLK: Frequency FRCLK Delay FRCLK falling to FRFRS Setup time FRDAT before FRCLK falling (center of bit period) Hold time FRDAT after FRCLK falling (center of bit period) Setup time FRMFB before FRCLK falling (center of bit period) Hold time FRMFB after FRCLK falling (center of bit period)
1) 1)
Limit Values Min Typ 30,518 32,768 - 130 ppm - 130 ppm 3 15 15 15 15 122 8,192 +130 ppm +130 ppm 32 Max
Unit ns MHz ns MHz ns ns ns ns ns
FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK
In case the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit is used for SRTS, the frequency deviation should be +/- 10 ppm
Data Sheet
249
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics Framer Transmit Interface
1 RFCLK 2 FTCKO 3 FTFRS 4 FTDAT 5 FTMFS
5
3
Figure 58 Table 36 No. 1 1A 2 2A 3 4 5
1)
Framer Transmit Interface Timing in FAM Framer Transmit Interface Timing in FAM Limit Values Min Typ 30,518 32,768 -130 ppm 122 -130 ppm 8,192 3 -3 3 -3 3 -3 +130 ppm +130 ppm 32 32 32 32 32 32 Max ns MHz ns MHz ns ns ns ns ns ns
1)
Parameter TRFCLK: Period RFCLK TFTCKO: Period FTCKO FFTCKO: Frequency FTCKO Delay FTCKO in falling to FTFRS Delay FTCKO out falling to FTFRS Delay FTCKO in falling to FTDAT Delay FTCKO out falling to FTDAT Delay FTCKO in falling to FTMFS Delay FTCKO out falling to FTMFS
Unit
FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK 1)
In case the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit is used for SRTS, the frequency deviation should be +/- 10 ppm
Data Sheet
250
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9.6.2.2
Framer Interface in GIM
Framer Receive Interface
1 RFCLK 2 FRCLK
FRFRS 4 FRDAT 6 FRMFB 7 5
Figure 59
Framer Receive Interface Timing in GIM
Table 37 Framer Receive Interface Timing in GIM
No. 1 Parameter TRFCLK: Period RFCLK 1) E1: T1: 1A FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK E1: T1: 2 TFRCLK: Period FRCLK E1: T1: 2A FFRCLK: Frequency FRCLK E1: T1: 2,048 1,544 MHz MHz 488 647 ns ns
1)
Limit Values Min Typ 30,518 40,478 32,768 24,704 Max
Unit
ns ns MHz MHz
Data Sheet
251
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
Table 37 Framer Receive Interface Timing in GIM (cont'd)
No. 4 5 6 7
1)
Parameter Setup time FRDAT before FRCLK falling (center of bit period) Hold time FRDAT after FRCLK falling (center of bit period) Setup time FRMFB before FRCLK falling (center of bit period) Hold time FRMFB after FRCLK falling (center of bit period)
Limit Values Min 15 15 15 15 Typ Max
Unit ns ns ns ns
In case the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit is used for SRTS, the frequency deviation should be +/- 10 ppm
Framer Transmit Interface
1 RFCLK 2 FTCKO 3 FTFRS 4 FTDAT 5 FTMFS 5 3
Figure 60 Table 38 No. 1
Framer Transmit Interface Timing in GIM Framer Transmit Interface Timing in GIM Limit Values Min Typ 30,518
252
Parameter TRFCLK: Period RFCLK1) E1:
Unit Max ns
2002-05-06
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics Table 38 No. Framer Transmit Interface Timing in GIM (cont'd) Limit Values Min T1: 1A FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK E1: T1: 2 TFTCKO: Period FTCKO E1: T1: 2A FFTCKO: Frequency FTCKO E1: T1: 3 4 5
1)
Parameter
Unit Max ns MHz MHz ns ns MHz MHz 32 32 32 32 32 32 ns ns ns ns ns ns
Typ 40,478
1)
32,768 24,704 488 647 2,048 1,544 3 -3 3 -3 3 -3
Delay FTCKO in falling to FTFRS Delay FTCKO out falling to FTFRS Delay FTCKO in falling to FTDAT Delay FTCKO out falling to FTDAT Delay FTCKO in falling to FTMFS Delay FTCKO out falling to FTMFS
In case the Internal Clock Recovery Circuit is used for SRTS, the frequency deviation should be +/- 10 ppm
Data Sheet
253
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9.6.2.3
Framer Interface in SYM Mode
Framer Interface in SYM2
1 RFCLK
opmo.frri = 1
1 RFCLK
opmo.frri = 0
3 FRDAT 5 FRMFB0 7 FTDAT 6
4
Figure 61 Table 39 No. 1 1A 3 4 5 6 7
1)
Framer Interface Timing for SYM 2.048 MHz Framer Interface AC Timing Characteristics in SYM2 Mode Limit Values Min Typ 488 2,048 15 Max ns MHz ns ns ns ns 32 ns Unit
Parameter TRFCLK: Period RFCLK FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK Setup time FRDAT before RFCLK falling/rising (center of bit period)
Hold time FRDAT after RFCLK falling/ 15 rising (center of bit period) Setup time FRMFBN1) before RFCLK falling/rising Hold time FRMFBN1) after RFCLK falling Delay RFCLK falling/rising to FTDAT
For usage of FRMFBN in SYM mode see Chapter 7.24
15 15 3
Data Sheet
254
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics Framer Interface in SYM8
1 RFCLK 3 FRDAT 5 FRMFB0 7 FTDAT 6 4
Figure 62 Table 40 No. 1 1A 3 4 5 6 7
1)
Framer Interface Timing in SYM 8.192 MHz Framer Interface Timing in SYM8 Limit Values Min Typ 122 -130 ppm 8,192 15 Max ns +130ppm MHz ns ns ns ns 32 ns Unit
Parameter TRFCLK: Period RFCLK FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK Setup time FRDAT before RFCLK falling/rising (center of bit period)
Hold time FRDAT after RFCLK falling/ 15 rising (center of bit period) Setup time FRMFBN1) before RFCLK 15 falling/rising Hold time FRMFBN1) after RFCLK falling Delay RFCLK falling to FTDAT
For usage of FRMFBN in SYM mode see Chapter 7.24
15 3
Data Sheet
255
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9.6.2.4
I
Framer Interface in EC Mode
1
R FC LK 2 F R FR S 0 3 FRDAT TS0.Bit1 5 F TD A T
even ports
2
4
TS1.Bit8
TS0.Bit1 5
TS1.Bit8
F TD A T
o dd p orts
TS1.Bit7
TS1.Bit6
TS1.Bit5
Figure 63 Table 41 No. 1 1A 2 3 4 5
Framer Interface Timing in EC Mode Framer Interface Timing in EC Mode Limit Values Min Typ 122 -130 ppm 8,192 3 15 32 Max ns +130ppm MHz ns ns ns 32 ns Unit
Parameter TRFCLK: Period RFCLK FRFCLK: Frequency RFCLK Delay RFCLK rising to FTFRS0 Setup time FRDAT before RFCLK falling (center of bit period)
Hold time FRDAT after RFCLK falling 15 (center of bit period) Delay RFCLK falling to FTDAT 3
9.6.3
UTOPIA Interface
The AC characteristics of the UTOPIA interface fulfills the ATM Forum "UTOPIA level 2 Specification, Version 1.0" as defined for the interface running at 33 MHz. The AC characteristics are based on the timing specification for the receiver side of a signal.
Data Sheet
256
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics The setup and the hold times are defined with regard to a positive clock edge, see Figure 64. Taking the actual used clock frequency into account (e.g. up to the max. frequency), the corresponding (min. and max.) transmit side "clock to output" propagation delay specifications can be derived. The timing references (tT5 to tT12) are according toTable 42 to Table 45. In the following tables, A>P (column DIR, Direction) defines a signal from the ATM layer (transmitter, driver) to the PHY layer (receiver), A

Clock
Signal
tT5, tT7
tT6, tT8
input setup to clock input hold from clock
Figure 64
Setup and hold time definition (single- and multi PHY)
Clock
tT9 tT10
Signal
tT11
signal going low impedance from clock signal going low impedance to clock
tT12
signal going high signal going high impedance from clock impedance to clock
Figure 65
Tri-state timing (multi-PHY, multiple devices only)
Data Sheet
257
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics Table 42 No. t1 tT2 tT3 tT4 tT5 tT6 TXDAT[7:0], TXPTY, TXSOC, TXENB TXCLAV Transmit Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz at Cell Interface, Single PHY) Description Limit Values Min TXCLK1) A>P TXCLK frequency (nominal) TXCLK duty cycle TXCLK peak-to-peak jitter TXCLK rise/fall time A>P Input setup to TXCLK Input hold from TXCLK 0 40 8 1 Max 33 60 5 3 MHz % % ns ns ns Unit
Signal Name DIR
tT7 tT8
1)
A

8 1
-
ns ns
The frequency should be equal or smaller than the coreclock CLOCK
Table 43 No. t1 tT2 tT3 tT4 tT5 tT6 tT7 tT8
Receive Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz at Cell Interface, Single PHY) Description Limit Values Min Max 33 60 5 3 MHz % % ns ns ns ns ns 0 40 8 1 8 1 Unit
Signal Name DIR RXCLK1)
A>P RXCLK frequency (nominal) RXCLK duty cycle RXCLK peak-to-peak jitter RXCLK rise/fall time
RXENB
A>P Input setup to RXCLK Input hold from RXCLK
RXDAT[7:0], A

1)
The frequency should be equal or smaller than the coreclock CLOCK
Data Sheet
258
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics Table 44 No. t1 tT2 tT3 tT4 tT5 tT6 TXDAT[7:0], TXPTY, TXSOC, TXENB, TXADR[4:0] TXCLAV Transmit Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz at Cell Interface, Multi-PHY) Description Limit Values Min TXCLK1) A>P TXCLK frequency (nominal) TXCLK duty cycle TXCLK peak-to-peak jitter TXCLK rise/fall time A>P Input setup to TXCLK Input hold from TXCLK 0 40 8 1 Max 33 60 5 3 MHz % % ns ns ns Unit
Signal Name DIR
tT7 tT8 tT9 tT10 tT11 tT12
1)
A

8 1 8 0 1 1
-
ns ns ns ns ns ns
The frequency should be equal or smaller than the coreclock CLOCK
Table 45 No. t1 tT2 tT3 tT4 tT5 tT6
Receive Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz at Cell Interface, Multi-PHY) Description Limit Values Min Max 33 60 5 3 MHz % % ns ns ns 0 40 8 1 Unit
Signal Name DIR RXCLK1)
A>P RXCLK frequency (nominal) RXCLK duty cycle RXCLK peak-to-peak jitter RXCLK rise/fall time
RXENB, RXADR[4:0]
A>P Input setup to RXCLK Input hold from RXCLK
Data Sheet
259
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics Table 45 No. tT7 tT8 tT9 tT10 tT11 tT12
1)
Receive Timing (8-Bit Data Bus, 33 MHz at Cell Interface, Multi-PHY) Description Limit Values Min Max ns ns ns ns ns ns 8 1 8 0 1 1 Unit
Signal Name DIR
RXDAT[7:0], A

The frequency should be equal or smaller than the coreclock CLOCK
9.6.4
IMA Interface
At the IMA interface the IWE8 operates in cycles of 12 system clocks. ATBTC can become active during cycle #3, the UNCHEC can become active during cycle #9. The Port number is always active for 6 cycles.
C LO C K 1 A TB T C 2 UNCHEC 3 P N 0..2
Figure 66
Timing of the IMA Interface
Data Sheet
260
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
Table 46 IMA Interface AC Timing Characteristics
No. 1 2 3
Parameter Min
Delay master clock to ATBTC Delay master clock to UNCHEC Delay master clock to PN[0:2]
Limit Values
Unit ns ns ns
Typ
Max
26 26 26
9.6.5
Clock Recovery Interface
CLOCK 6 SCLK 1 SSP 2 SDI B it1 B it0 3 B it3 0 1
B it3 1 4
SDOD
B it1
B it0
B it3 1 5
B it3 0
SDOR
B it1
B it0
B it3 1
B it3 0
Figure 67 Table 47 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Clock Recovery Interface Timing Diagram Clock Recovery Interface AC Timing Characteristics Limit Values Min Typ Max 11 ns ns ns -1 20 0 0 0 1 Unit
Parameter Delay SCLK rising to SSP Setup time SDI before SCLK rising Hold time SDI after SCLK rising Delay SCLK rising to SDOD Delay SCLK rising to SDOR Delay CLOCK to SCLK
11 11
16
ns ns ns
Data Sheet
261
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9.6.6 9.6.6.1
M PADR
Microprocessor Interface Intel Mode
1 M PCS 2 M PW R 10 M PRDY 4 M PDAT 7 3 5 6 8
9
11
Figure 68 Table 48 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Intel Mode Write Cycle Timing Diagram Intel Mode Write Cycle AC Characteristics Limit Values Min Typ Max ns ns 20 ns 2 x Tclock ns 2 x Tclock 10 5 5 5 2 2 20 20 23xTclock ns ns ns ns ns ns ns 0 0 2 Unit
Parameter Setup time MPADR before MPCS low Setup time MPCS before MPWR low Delay MPRDY low after MPWR low MPDAT valid after MPWR low Pulse width MPRDY low MPRDY high to MPWR high Hold time MPDAT after MPWR high Hold time MPCS after MPWR high Hold time MPADR after MPWR high Delay MPCS low to MPRDY high Delay MPCS high to MPRDY high impedance
Data Sheet
262
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
M PADR 1 M PCS 2 M PRD 12 M PRDY 10 M PDAT 5 11 7 3 4 6 13 8 9
Figure 69 Table 49 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Intel Mode Read Cycle Timing Diagram Intel Mode Read Cycle AC Timing Characteristics
Limit Values Min Typ Max ns ns 20 ns ns ns ns ns ns 20 20 20 20 ns ns ns ns 23xTclock ns 0 0 2 2 x Tclock 10 10 3 5 5 4 5 2 2 Unit
Parameter Setup time MPADR before MPCS low Setup time MPCS before MPRD low Delay MPRDY low after MPRD low Pulse width MPRDY low MPDAT valid before MPRDY high MPRDY high to MPRD high Delay time MPDAT after MPRD high Hold time MPCS after MPRD high Hold time MPADR after MPRD high Delay MPRD low to MPDAT low impedance Delay MPRD high to MPDAT high impedance Delay MPCS low to MPRDY high Delay MPCS high to MPRDY high impedance
Data Sheet
263
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics
9.6.6.2
MPADR
Motorola Mode
1 MPCS 3 MPRW 5 MPTS 7 MPTA 12 MPDAT (READ) 16 MPDAT (WRITE) 13 8 10 9 6
2
4
11
14 15
17
Figure 70 Table 50 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Motorola Mode Timing Diagram Motorola Mode AC Timing Characteristics Limit Values Min Typ Max ns ns ns ns ns ns 15 Tclock 15 ns ns ns ns 23x Tclock ns 0 5 0 5 10 0 5 2 x Tclock Tclock 0 5 Unit
Parameter Setup time MPADR before MPCS low Hold time MPADR after MPTS high Setup time MPCS before MPTS low Hold time MPCS after MPTS high Setup time MPRW before MPTS low Hold time MPRW after MPTS high Delay MPCS low to MPTA high Delay MPTA low after MPTS low Pulse width MPTA low MPTA low to MPTS high Delay MPCS high to MPTA high impedance
Data Sheet
264
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics Table 50 No. 12 13 14 15 16 17 Motorola Mode AC Timing Characteristics (cont'd) Limit Values Min Delay MPTS low to MPDAT low impedance MPDAT valid before MPTA high Delay time MPDAT after MPTS high Delay MPTS high to MPDAT high impedance MPDAT valid after MPTS low Hold time MPDAT after MPTS high 5 1 5 2 2 17 Typ Max 15 ns ns ns ns Unit
Parameter
2 x Tclock ns ns
9.6.7
CLOCK
RAM Interface
8
Basic 12 RMCLK cycle
9
RMCLK
1
RMADR
AR1
AR2
AR3
AR4
AR5
AR6 2
AW1
AW2
AW3
AW4
AW5
AR1
RMADC
2 2
RMOE
34 5 R 2 R 3 R 4 R 5 R 6 W1 6 W2 W3 W4 W5 7
RMDAT
R 1
2
2
RMWR
2 2
RMCS
Figure 71
RAM Interface Timing Diagram
Data Sheet
265
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics Table 51 No. 1 2 RAM Interface AC Timing Characteristics Limit Values Min Delay RMCLK rising to RMADR Delay RMCLK rising to RMADC Delay RMCLK rising to RMOE Delay RMCLK rising to RMWR Delay RMCLK rising to RMCS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9A Setup time RMDAT before RMCLK rising (all read cycles) Hold time RMDAT after RMCLK rising (all read cycles) Delay RMCLK falling to RMDAT low impedance (write cycle W1) Delay RMCLK rising to RMDAT (write cycles W2 to W5) Delay RMCLK falling to RMDAT high impedance (write cycle W5) Delay CLOCK to RMCLK TRMCLK: Period RMCLK FRMCLK: Frequency RMCLK 1 1 1 1 1 11 0 0 6 0 6 TCLOCK FCLOCK 8 12 8 12 Typ Max 11 7 7 7 7 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns MHz Unit
Parameter
9.6.8
Boundary-Scan Test Interface
1 TCK 2 TDI 4 TDO 6 TRST 5 3
Figure 72
Data Sheet
Boundary-Scan Test Interface Timing Diagram
266 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Electrical Characteristics Table 52 No. 1 1A 2 3 4 5 6 Boundary-Scan Test Interface AC Timing Characteristics Limit Values Min TTCK: Period TCK FTCK: Frequency TCK Setup time TMS, TDI before TCK rising 10 Hold time TMS, TDI after TCK rising Delay TCK falling to TDO valid Delay TCK falling to TDO high impedance Pulse width TRST low 10 0 0 2 x TTCK 30 30 160 6,25 Typ Max ns MHz ns ns ns ns ns Unit
Parameter
Data Sheet
267
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Testmode
10
10.1
31
Testmode
Device Identification Register
28 27 Partnumber(15:0) 0000000001000110B 12 11 00001000001B 1 0 1
Version(3:0) 0010B
Manufacturer-ID(10:0)
10.2
Instruction Register
The following table shows the instruction binary codes for the 4 bit instruction register. Code Boundary-Scan Instruction Register Binary Codes 0000 = EXTEST 0001 = IDCODE 0101 = SAMPLE 0101 = INTEST 0111 = CLAMP 1111 = BYPASS
10.3
Boundary-Scan Register
Table 53 describes the Boundary-Scan register. The register contains 299 cells. The cells of type "control" will disable the corresponding outputs when set. The control cells are preset to a safe logic-1 during the TEST-LOGIC-RESET state of the TAP controller. Table 53 Name ftcko_4_o ftcko_4_i ftcko_4_c ftcko_5_o ftcko_5_i ftcko_5_c rtsen_n mpcs_n
Data Sheet
Boundary Scan Register Name rxdat_2_o rxdat_3_o rxdat_4_o rxdat_5_o rxdat_6_o rxdat_7_o rxprt_o rxprt_c
268
Name ftcko_0_o ftcko_0_i ftcko_0_c frfrsn_0_o frfrsn_0_c ftdat_0_o ftdat_0_c ftmfs_0_o
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Testmode Table 53 Name mpwr_n mprd_n mpdat_0_o mpdat_0_i mpdat_c mpdat_1_o mpdat_1_i mpdat_2_o mpdat_2_i mpdat_3_o mpdat_3_i mpdat_4_o mpdat_4_i mpdat_5_o mpdat_5_i mpdat_6_o mpdat_6_i mpdat_7_o mpdat_7_i mpdat_8_o mpdat_8_i mpdat_9_o mpdat_9_i mpdat_10_o mpdat_10_i mpdat_11_o mpdat_11_i mpdat_12_o mpdat_12_i mpdat_13_o Boundary Scan Register (cont'd) Name rxenb_o rxenb_i rxenb_c rxclk rmclk pmt rmdat_0_o rmdat_0_i rmdat_c rmdat_1_o rmdat_1_i rmdat_2_o rmdat_2_i rmdat_3_o rmdat_3_i rmdat_4_o rmdat_4_i rmdat_5_o rmdat_5_i rmdat_6_o rmdat_6_i rmdat_7_o rmdat_7_i rmdat_8_o rmdat_8_i sdi rmdat_9_o rmdat_9_i rmdat_10_o rmdat_10_i Name ftmfs_0_c ftfrsn_0_o ftfrsn_0_c frlos_1 frclk_1 frdat_1 frmfb_1 ftcko_1_o ftcko_1_i ftcko_1_c frfrsn_1_o frfrsn_1_c ftdat_1_o ftdat_1_c ftmfs_1_o ftmfs_1_c ftfrsn_1_o ftfrsn_1_c frlos_2 frclk_2 frdat_2 frmfb_2 ftcko_2_o ftcko_2_i ftcko_2_c frfrsn_2_o frfrsn_2_c ftdat_2_o ftdat_2_c ftmfs_2_o
Data Sheet
269
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Testmode Table 53 Name mpdat_13_i mpdat_14_o mpdat_14_i mpdat_15_o mpdat_15_i rfclk clock reset_n mprdy_o mprdy_c pn_0 mpir1_n mpir2_n mpadr_0 mpadr_1 mpadr_2 mpadr_3 mpadr_4 mpadr_5 mpadr_6 mpadr_7 mpadr_8 mpadr_9 mpadr_10 mpadr_11 mpadr_12 mpadr_13 mpadr_14 mpadr_15 mpadr_16 Boundary Scan Register (cont'd) Name rmdat_11_o rmdat_11_i rmdat_12_o rmdat_12_i tbus rmdat_13_o rmdat_13_i sdod sdor rmdat_14_o rmdat_14_i rmdat_15_o rmdat_15_i rmdat_16_o rmdat_16_i ssp rmdat_17_o rmdat_17_i rmdat_18_o rmdat_18_i rmdat_19_o rmdat_19_i rmdat_20_o rmdat_20_i sclk rmdat_21_o rmdat_21_i rmdat_22_o rmdat_22_i rmdat_23_o Name ftmfs_2_c ftfrsn_2_o ftfrsn_2_c frlos_3 frclk_3 frdat_3 frmfb_3 ftcko_3_o ftcko_3_i ftcko_3_c frfrsn_3_o frfrsn_3_c ftdat_3_o ftdat_3_c ftmfs_3_o ftmfs_3_c ftfrsn_3_o ftfrsn_3_c frlos_4 frclk_4 frdat_4 frmfb_4 tscsh frfrsn_4_o frfrsn_4_c ftdat_4_o ftdat_4_c ftmfs_4_o ftmfs_4_c ftfrsn_4_o
Data Sheet
270
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Testmode Table 53 Name mpadr_17 licec clk52 e1ds1 tscen txadr_0 txadr_1 txadr_2 txadr_3 txadr_4 rxadr_0 rxadr_1 rxadr_2 rxadr_3 rxadr_4 pn_1 pn_2 txcla_i txcla_o txcla_c txenb_o txenb_i txenb_c txsoc txdat_0 txdat_1 txdat_2 txdat_3 txdat_4 txdat_5 Boundary Scan Register (cont'd) Name rmdat_23_i rmdat_24_o rmdat_24_i rmdat_25_o rmdat_25_i rmdat_26_o rmdat_26_i rmdat_27_o rmdat_27_i rmdat_28_o rmdat_28_i rmdat_29_o rmdat_29_i rmdat_30_o rmdat_30_i rmdat_31_o rmdat_31_i rmdat_32_o rmdat_32_i rmwr_n rmcs_n rmoe_n rmadc_n unchec_4 rmadr_0 rmadr_1 rmadr_2 rmadr_3 rmadr_4 rmadr_5 Name ftfrsn_4_c frlos_5 frclk_5 frdat_5 frmfb_5 frfrsn_5_o frfrsn_5_c ftdat_5_o ftdat_5_c ftmfs_5_o ftmfs_5_c ftfrsn_5_o ftfrsn_5_c frlos_6 frclk_6 frdat_6 frmfb_6 frfrsn_6_o frfrsn_6_c ftdat_6_o ftdat_6_c ftmfs_6_o ftmfs_6_c ftfrsn_6_o ftfrsn_6_c frlos_7 frclk_7 frdat_7 frmfb_7 ftcko_6_o
Data Sheet
271
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Testmode Table 53 Name txdat_6 txdat_7 txprt uttr_n txclk rxsoc_o rxsoc_c rxcla_o rxcla_i rxcla_c atbtc_3 rxdat_0_o rxdat_c rxdat_1_o Boundary Scan Register (cont'd) Name rmadr_6 rmadr_7 rmadr_8 rmadr_9 rmadr_10 rmadr_11 rmadr_12 rmadr_13 rmadr_14 rmadr_15 frlos_0 frclk_0 frdat_0 frmfb_0 Name ftcko_6_i ftcko_6_c ftcko_7_o ftcko_7_i ftcko_7_c frfrsn_7_o frfrsn_7_c ftdat_7_o ftdat_7_c ftmfs_7_o ftmfs_7_c ftfrsn_7_o ftfrsn_7_c
Data Sheet
272
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Package Outlines
11
Package Outlines
Sorts of Packing Package outlines for tubes, trays etc. are contained in our Data Book "Package Information". SMD = Surface Mounted Device
Dimensions in mm
Figure 73
Package Outline: P-BGA-256 (Plastic Metric Quad Flat Package)
Data Sheet
273
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Appendix
12
12.1
Appendix
ATM Adaptation Layer 1
The ATM Adaptation Layer 1 (AAL1) consists of two sublayers: The Segmentation and Reassembly Sublayer (SAR), which is responsible for sequence integrity of the transmitted ATM cell stream and the Convergency Sublayer, responsible for blocking of user data into 47-octet SAR boundaries. Figure 74 gives an overview on the AAL1 frame-structure as defined in ITU-T I.363.1 [31].
Parity Pointer
1 bit 7 bit
AAL user info
N octets
Dummy Fill
P format
P
1 octet
User information
46 octets
CS-Sublayer
Non-P format
User information
47 octets
CSI
1 bit
SC
3 bit
CRC
3 bit
Py
1 bit
SAR-Sublayer SN SNP SAR-SDU
47 octets
1 octet
ATM Header
5 octets Pointer CSI
ATM-SDU = SAR-PDU
48 octets
ATM Layer
SC CRC Py SN SNP SAR SDU PDU
= octet offset of data block over 2 cells (111 1111 if not required) = Convergency Sublayer Indication Non-P Format: CSI = 0 P format: CSI = 1 if SC = 0,2,4 or 6, P-field may be inserted CSI = 0 if SC = 1,3,5 or 7, P-field is unused (Non-P format used) = Sequence Count = Cyclic Redundancy Check = Even Parity bit = Sequence Number incremented by 1 modulo 8 for each SAR-SDU = Sequence Number Protection = Segmentation & Reassembly = Service Data Unit = Protocol Data Unit
Figure 74
Structure of the AAL1 SAR-PDU
Data Sheet
274
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Appendix Robust Sequence Count Algorithm This algorithm is completely described in annex D of the ETSI B-ISDN AAL type 1 Specification [17] and ITU-T I.363.1 [31] and is shown in Figure Figure 75. The algorithm is described by a state machine of 5 states. A change in states within the state machine is indicated by an arrow, on which there are two distinct values represented. The first value refers to the event that originates the state change, and the second value refers to the action to be taken as a result of that event. A decision in this algorithm is taken after evaluation of 2 consecutive SN. This means that when a cell is received it must be temporarily stored, waiting for the next cell before it is finally passed to the reassembly buffer. In the state machine, an action to be taken (accept or discard) always refers to the stored cell. The sequence counting of modulo 8 permits that the algorithm detects a maximum of to 6 consecutive lost cells and 1 misinserted cell, assuming that misinsertion of one cell is at least as probable as the loss of 7 consecutive cells. Lost cells are compensated by inserting an appropriate number of dummy cells into the transmitted data of the channel. This is required to maintain bit count integrity. The number of octets inserted per dummy cell is equal to the number of user information octets in the SAR-PDU payload of each cell. When one misinserted cell is detected, the algorithm is able to delete the misinserted cell, because of the delay of one cell in taking a decision.
Data Sheet
275
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Appendix
invalid SN/discard
Initialization
out of seq/discard
Start
valid SN/discard invalid SN/discard
Out of Sync
out of seq/discard in seq/accept invalid SN/discard in seq - 1+1/accept in seq - 1/discard out of seq/accept in seq/accept
T1306830-95
in seq/insert dummy cell(s) + accept Sync
in seq - 1+1/accept
invalid SN/accept
in seq - 1/discard
Out of Seq
invalid SN/discard Invalid
Figure 75
Informative and Example Algorithm State Machine (Fig. III.2/I.363.1)
Data Sheet
276
2002-05-06
out of seq/discard
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Appendix Fast Sequence Count Algorithm The state machines of the robust SC algorithm and the fast SC algorithm are the same. The only difference is that in the fast algorithm, the action to be taken always refers to the currently received cell, while in the standard algorithm it refers to the temporarily stored cell. Therefore the fast SC algorithm does not introduce additional one-cell delay. In the fast SC algorithm, a misinserted cell is immediately accepted in the reassembly buffer. Only at the arrival of the next cell, it is detected that the previous cell was misinserted. Because the misinserted cell was already accepted, the current (in sequence) cell will be discarded instead. Lost cells are compensated with the insertion of dummy cells as in the standard algorithm. Frequency and Value of the Pointer Field The pointer field contains the binary value of the offset, measured in octets, between the end of the pointer field and the start of the structured block, in the 93 octet payload. The payload consists of the remaining 46 octets of this SAR-PDU payload and the 47 octets of the next SAR-PDU payload. The frequency of occurrence of the pointer field is according to ITU-T I.363.1 [31]. The pointer field is used exactly once in every cycle, where a cycle is the sequence of eight consecutive SAR-PDUs with Sequence Count values 0, 1, to 7. The pointer field is used at the first available opportunity in a cycle to point to a start of a structured block. If a start of a structured block is not present in a cycle, then a pointer field containing a dummy offset value `127' is used at the last opportunity in the cycle.
Data Sheet
277
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Appendix
12.2
Synchronous Residual Time Stamp SRTS
This sub chapter contains a short description of the SRTS method, as defined in [12] and [31]. The SRTS algorithm is used to measure the frequency deviation of a data stream which is packetized in ATM cells. This frequency is coded in 4 bits and sent to the receiver. At the receiver, the correct frequency is regenerated. The 4 RTS bits are spread over 8 ATM cells. These 8 ATM cells contain 8 x 47 byte x 8 bit/byte = 3008 bits of data. In case of an E1 line, the data arrives with 2.048 Mbit/s, thus after 3008 bit / 2.048 Mbit/s = 1,46875 ms a complete RTS value is received. The frequency of generated RTS values is 681 Hz. The RTS value is calculated in the following way: In N = 3008 cycles of Fdata, we have Mq cycles of the reduced network clock. The reduced network clock Fnx has to fulfil the following equation: 1 <= Fnx / Fdata < 2. This defines the value of x in the equation: Fnx = 8 kHz X 19440 / 2^x. For a full E1 line Fdata = 2.048 MHz, x = 6 and Fnx = 2.43 MHz. The maximum input frequency deviation of 200 ppm (E1 lines: less than 50 ppm) of the data clock translates in a deviation from Mq. At the receiving side, the same network clock is available and the numbers N and x are known. As a result, the nominal value Mnom of Mq is known, and only the deviation from Mnom has to be transmitted. The number of bits to transmit the deviation (p = 4) has to be sufficient for the maximum frequency deviation.
tolerance N cycles T seconds fs t
Mq fnx
Mmin Mnom
Mmax
t y 2p
T1817630-92
y
Figure 76
The Concept of Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS) (Fig. 5/ I.363.1)
278 2002-05-06
Data Sheet
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Appendix RTS values are generated as follows:
T
fs
Counter A divided by N
Latch
RTS
fn
1 -- x
fnx
P-bit counter Ct
T1817640-92
Figure 77
Generation of Residual Time Stamp (RTS) (Fig.6/ I.363.1)
The transformation of RTS values in a clock is not specified in the SRTS specifications. Basically (the implementation is slightly different), the ICRC calculates another RTS value based on the transmit clock. The difference between received RTS values and locally calculated RTS values, drives a DCO. This solution can be described as a PLL with an unusual phase comparator.
Data Sheet
279
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Appendix
12.3
Adaptive Clock Method ACM
The adaptive clock method does not require information concerning the source clock transferred over the ATM network. The speed of the transmitter is adjusted to the filling level of the receive buffer. If the transmit clock is too slow, the buffer filling level will increase causing the clock recovery circuit to slow down the transmit clock. If the transmit clock is too fast the buffer filling level will decrease. In this case the clock recovery circuit will increase the transmit clock.
Data Sheet
280
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Appendix
12.4
Channel Associated Signalling
ITU-T recommendation G.704 [24] defines Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) for interfaces at 2048 Kbit/s (E1) and 1544 Kbit/s (DS1) interfaces carrying 64 kbit/s channels. The mapping of E1 or DS1 multiframes containing CAS into ATM cells is defined in the ATM-Forum "Circuit Emulation Services Specification" [10]. In case of E1 and DS1 circuit emulation, the user information carried via AAL1 consists of a stream of payload substructures followed by an optional signalling substructure. Each payload and signalling substructure corresponds to one E1 multiframe / DS1 extended superframe. The payload substructure contains the channel slots and the optional signalling substructure contains the signalling bits associated with the channels. The following section gives an overview on this topic.
12.4.1
E1
An E1 multiframe comprises 16 consecutive frames. These are numbered from 0 to15. The multiframe alignement signal is 0000 and occupies digit time slots 1 to 4 of 64 kbit/ s channel time slot 16 in frame 0. When 64 kbit/s channel time slot 16 is used for channel-associated signalling, the 64 kbit/s capacity is sub-multiplexed into lower-rate signalling channels using the multiframe alignement signal as a reference. Details of the bit allocation are given in Table 54 Table 54 Bit allocation of channel associated 64 kbit/s time slot 16 for channel associated signalling Bit allocation of time slot 16 0000 abcd channel 1 abcd channel 2 ... abcd channel 15 xyxx abcd channel 16 abcd channel 17 ... abcd channel 30
E1 Multiframe Frame 0 (CasBeginFrame) Frame 1 Frame 2 ... Frame 15
x = spare bit, to be set to 1 if not used
y = Bit used for alarm indication to the remote end. In undisturbed operation, set to 0; in alarm condition, set to 1.
Data Sheet
281
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Appendix
.
A TM S D U of 1st ce ll
A A L1 h ead er oc tet A A L s tru ctu re po inte r = 0 tim es lot x tim es lot y tim es lot z tim es lot x tim es lot y tim es lot z
1 st fra m e
2 nd fra m e
tim es lot tim es lot tim es lot tim es lot
x y z x
1 5th fram e
1st m ultifram e
ATM SDU o f 2 nd ce ll
A A L1 h ead er oc tet tim es lot y tim es lot z A B C D tim e slot x A B C D tim es lot y A B C D tim e slot z u nus ed =0 00 0 tim es lot x tim es lot y tim es lot z
1 6th fram e s igna lling s ubs tru ctu re 1 st fra m e 2n d m ultifram e 1 4th fram e
tim es lot tim es lot tim es lot tim es lot
x y z x
Figure 78
Example Multiframe Structure for 3x64 Kbit/s E1 with CAS
12.4.2
DS1
An DS1 multiframe consists of 24 frames. They are numbered from 1 to 24. In the multiframe there are four different signalling bits (A, B, C and D) providing four independent 333 bit/s channels, two independent 667 bit/s channels or one 1333 bit/s channel. The four signalling bits for each time slot are transported in the last bit of each time slot of the frames 6, 12, 18, 24. In these frames only 7 bits are available for data transmission (Robbed Bit Signalling). When mapping DS1 Nx64 Kbit/s frames into ATM cells the CAS bits may also be transmitted in the payload section. However, only the signalling bits of the CAS substructure are relevant.
Data Sheet
282
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Appendix Table 55 Allocation of Channel Associated Signalling Bits to 24 Frame Multiframe Digit time slot in each channel used for Characters Signalling Frame 1 (CasBeginFrame) - Frame 5 1-8 Frame 6 Frame 7 - Frame 11 Frame 12 Frame 13 - Frame 17 Frame 18 Frame 19 - Frame 23 Frame 24 1-7 1-8 1-7 1-8 1-7 1-8 1-7 8 8 8 8 Signalling channel identifier 333 bit/s A B C D 667 bit/s A B A B 1333 bit/s A A A A
DS1 Multiframe
A A L1 h ead er oc tet A A L s tru ctu re po inte r = 0 tim es lot x tim es lot x tim es lot x
1 st fra m e 2nd fram e 3 rd fra m e 1st m ulti22 th fra m e fram e 23 th fra m e 24 th fra m e sig na lling 1 st fra m e 2nd fram e 3 rd fra m e 2n d m ultifram e 19 th fra m e 20 th fra m e 2 1st fra m e
A TM S D U A B C D ts x
tim es lot x tim es lot x tim es lot x u nus ed =0 00 0 tim es lot x tim es lot x tim es lot x
tim es lot x tim es lot x tim es lot x
Example Multiframe Structure for 1x64 Kbit/s DS1 with CAS
Data Sheet
283
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Contacts for SRTS Patent Fee
13
Contacts for SRTS Patent Fee
When using the PXB4220 a patent fee for the SRTS clock recovery needs to be paid to Telcordia Technologies, Inc.:
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. 331 Newman Springs Road NVC-3Z375 Red Bank, NJ 07701-5699 Web: http://www.telcordia.com
Data Sheet
284
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Glossary
14
AAL ACM ATM B-ISDN CBR CDV CES CLP CRC CS CSI DCO DS1 EC FALC FAM FIFO FS/DL FSM GFC GIM HEC I/O ICRC ITU ITU-T IWE8 IWECORE LCD LIC
Data Sheet
Glossary
ATM Adaptation Layer Adaptive Clock Method Asynchronous Transfer Mode Broadband - Integrated Services Digital Network Constant Bit Rate Cell Delay Variation Circuit Emulation Service Cell Loss Priority Cyclic Redundancy Check Convergence Sublayer Convergence Sublayer Indication Digitally Controlled Oscillator Digital Signal 1 (1.544 Mbit/s) (=T1) Echo Canceller Framer And Line Interface Component FALC Mode First In, First Out Buffer Frame Sync/Data Link Finite State Machine Generic Flow Control Generic Interface Mode Header Error Control Input/Output Internal Clock Recovery Circuit International Telecommunications Union International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications Standardization Sector Interworking Element component for 8 channels PXB 4220 IWE8 without ICRC Loss of Cell Delineation Line Interface Card or Line Interface Circuit
285 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Glossary LOS LSB MSB NIC NNI OAM OCD PDU PHY PTI RTS SAR SARE SC SDT SN SNP SRTS SSRAM SYM TAP TBD UDT UNI UTOPIA UTOPIA Receive Interface (Upstream) UTOPIA Transmit Interface (Downstream) VC
Data Sheet
Loss of Signal Least Significant Bit Most Significant Bit Network Interface Controller or Card Network-to-Network Interface Operation, Administration, and Maintenance Out of Cell Delineation Protocol Data Unit Physical Layer Device Payload Type Identifier Residual Time Stamp Segmentation And Reassembly Segmentation And Reassembly Element, PXB 4110 Sequence Count Structured Data Transfer Sequence Number Sequence Number Protection Synchronous Residual Time Stamp Synchronous Static RAM Synchronous Mode Test Access Port To Be Defined Unstructured Data Transfer User-to-Network Interface Universal Test and Operations Physical Interface for ATM Data is transferred from the PHY Layer (in this case the IWE8) to the ATM Layer.
Data is transferred from the ATM Layer to the PHY Layer (in this case the IWE8).
Virtual Channel
286 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Glossary VCI VP VPI Virtual Channel Identifier Virtual Path Virtual Path Identifier
Data Sheet
287
2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Bibliography
15
Bibliography
1. ANSI, American National Standard for Telecommunications. Digital Hierarchy Formats Specification, T1.107-1995. 2. ANSI, B-ISDN Customer Installation Interfaces: Physical Layer Specification, Draft American National Standard for Telecommunications, T1E1.2/93 020R2. 3. ANSI, B-ISDN Network Node Interfaces and Inter-Network Interfaces: Rates and Formats Specification, Draft American National Standard for Telecommunications T1S1.5/94 001R1. 4. ATM Forum, DS1 Physical Layer Specification, Version 1.0, af-phy-0016, September 1994 5. ATM Forum: UTOPIA Specification Level 1, Version 2.01, af-phy-0017.000, March 1994 6. ATM Forum: UTOPIA Level 2 Specification, Version 1.0, ATM Forum Contribution afphy-0039.000, June 1995. 7. ATM Forum, "E1 Physical Interface Specification", af-phy-0064.000, September, 1996 8. ATM Forum, Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA Specification, Version 1.1, af-phy0086.001, February, 1999 9. ATM Forum, "ATM on Fractional E1/T1", str-phy-fn64-01.00, July, 1999 10.ATM Forum, Circuit Emulation Service Interoperability Specification Version 2.0, afvtoa-0078.000, January, 1997. 11.ATM Forum, "User-Network Interface Specification", Version 3.1, 1994 12.Bellcore, Generic requirement, ATM and AAL protocols, GR-1113-CORE, Issue 1, July 1994 13.Bellcore, Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) and ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) Protocols Generic Requirements, GR-1113-CORE, Issue 1, July 1994. 14.Bellcore, "Digital Cross-Connect System - Generic Requirements and Objectives", TR-NWT-000170, Issue 2, January, 1993 15.Bellcore, B-ISDN UNI and NNI Physical Layer Generic Criteria, TR-NWT-001112, Issue 1, June 1993 16.Bellcore, Transport Systems Generic Requirements, TR-TSV-000499, Issue 4, December 1991 17.ETSI, B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) Specification Type 1, prI-ETS 300353, December 1994 18.ETSI, Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic Frame Structures for the Transport of Various Signals (including ATM cells) at the CCITT Recommendation. G.702 Hierarchical Rates of 2048-kbit/s, 34368-kbit/s and 139264-kbit/s; prETS 300337, February 1993 19.IEEE Std 1149.1-1990, IEEE Standard Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture 20.Infineon, Data sheet: Frame and Line Interface Component (FALC), PEB 2254 21.Infineon, Prelininary Product Overview: Smart Integrated Digital Echo Canceller (SIDEC), PEB 20954
Data Sheet 288 2002-05-06
PXB4219 / PXB4220 / PXB4221
Bibliography 22.ITU-T, Recommendation G.131, Control of talker echo, revised 1996 23.ITU-T, Recommendation G.703, Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces, Geneva 1991 24.ITU-T, Recommendation G.704, Synchronous Frame Structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8488 and 44736 kbit/s Hierarchical Levels, 07/95 25.ITU-T, Recommendation G.775, Loss of Signal and Alarm Indication Signal Defect Detection Criteria for Equipment Interfaces described in Recommendation G.703 and Operating at Bit Rates described in Recommendation G.702, COM 15-R 9-E, October 1993 26.ITU-T, Recommendation G.804, "ATM Cell Mapping into Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH)", February 1998 27.ITU-T, Recommendation G.823, The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on the 2048-kbit/s Hierarchy, March 1993 28.ITU-T, Recommendation G.824, The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are based on the 1544-kbit/s Hierarchy, March 1993 29.ITU-T Recommendation I.231.10, "Circuit-mode Multiple-rate Unrestricted 8 kHz Structured Bearer Service Category" 30.ITU-T, Recommendation I.361, B-ISDN ATM Layer Specification, 11/95 31.ITU-T, Draft Recommendation I.363.1, B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer specification: Type 1 AAL, 08/96 32.ITU-T Recommendation I.432 "B-ISDN user-network interface - Physical layer specification", March, 1993 33.ITU-T Recommendation I.432.1 "B-ISDN user-network interface - Physical layer specification: General characteristics", August, 1996 34.ITU-T Recommendation I.432.3 "B-ISDN user-network interface - Physical layer specification: 1544 kbit/s and 2048 kbit/s operation", August, 1996
Data Sheet
289
2002-05-06
Infineon goes for Business Excellence
"Business excellence means intelligent approaches and clearly defined processes, which are both constantly under review and ultimately lead to good operating results. Better operating results and business excellence mean less idleness and wastefulness for all of us, more professional success, more accurate information, a better overview and, thereby, less frustration and more satisfaction."
Dr. Ulrich Schumacher
http://www.infineon.com
Published by Infineon Technologies AG


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of PXB4219

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X